JP2017189359A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving taste of a game using a reserve device by increasing merits of reserving game balls in the reserve device.SOLUTION: The game machine includes: a reserve device 400 capable of reserving game balls; a general winning hole 31b being less prone to enter game balls, unless the game balls are released from reserve of the reserve device 400; and a second frame button for releasing the reserve of the reserve device 400. A distribution movable valve 409 executes distribution operation of changing between a retreat position in which game balls released from the reserve are less prone to enter the general winning hole 31b, and a projection position in which the game balls are prone to enter the general winning hole 31b. A third symbol display device 42 displays an operation performance including a display of an operation request of requesting to operate the second frame button during a display of a prescribed display performance. The distribution movable valve 409 executes the distribution operation at timing asynchronous with start timing of the prescribed display performance and the operation performance. The operation performance is so adjusted that timing when the operation request is displayed is synchronized with timing when the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the projection position.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 2

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, and more particularly to a gaming machine including a holding device for holding a game ball.

  Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine equipped with a holding device for holding a game ball launched on a gaming board having a gaming area. In this type of gaming machine, the game ball released from the holding device is released when the holding device releases the hold by operating the release operation button while the game ball is held in the holding device. Some are configured to enter a general winning opening that does not give a big hit lottery (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2006-95235 (page 10, FIG. 2)

However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, in the case of a conventional gaming machine, when a game ball is held in the holding device, the player operates the hold release button to put the held game ball into the general winning opening, but the hold is further performed. There is no merit of holding the game ball in the device. On the other hand, even if the game ball is not held in the holding device, the game ball that has been launched into the game area aiming for the starting prize opening etc. should directly enter the general prize opening, There is a problem that it may be bothersome to operate the hold release button every time a game ball is put on hold by the holding device.

  This is a problem that also occurs in a game machine of a type in which a game ball held in a holding device is entered into a start winning opening or a big winning opening.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that improves the merit of holding a game ball in a holding device and improves the interest of a game using the holding device. With the goal.

In order to achieve such an object, the present invention has the following configuration.
That is, the invention described in claim 1
A game board having a game area where game balls can flow down;
Starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
At least when a right-handed game is performed, a game ball that flows down the game area is provided at a position where the game ball can enter, a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and a game ball that is easier to enter than in the closed state Variable entry means that changes to an open state;
Entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting entry means;
Lottery means for performing lottery capable of determining whether or not to cause a special gaming state based on detection of a game ball by the ball detection means;
A gaming machine in which a predetermined display effect is displayed on a display means based on the result of the lottery being a predetermined result,
A holding device that changes between a holding state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be held and a release state in which the holding of the game ball is released;
A prize opening that is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter if the game ball is not released from the holding device in the game area, and a predetermined game value is obtained based on the game ball entering;
An operation means for receiving an operation of a player, including an operation of changing the hold device from the hold state to the release state;
A sorting operation is performed that changes between a first position that makes it difficult to win the game ball whose hold has been released to the winning opening and a second position that makes it easier to win the game ball whose hold has been released to the winning opening. A sorting member;
An operation effect control means for controlling an operation effect including an operation request display requesting an operation of the operation means to be displayed on the display means during the display of the predetermined display effect;
A distribution operation control means for controlling the distribution operation of the distribution member at a timing not synchronized with a start timing of the predetermined display effect and the operation effect;
The operation effect control means adjusts at least one of the predetermined display effect and the operation effect so that the timing at which the operation request is displayed matches the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position. It is characterized by.

  [Operation / Effect] According to the invention described in claim 1, the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device can be enhanced, and the interest of the game using the holding device can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to improve the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device and improve the interest of the game using the holding device.

It is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine of Example 1 of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board in the state attached to the inner frame. It is an enlarged view of the lower right game area of the game board shown in FIG. 2 for demonstrating a holding | maintenance apparatus. It is sectional drawing which shows the state which removed the decoration board from the holding | maintenance apparatus shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the sorting movable valve shown in FIG. 4. It is a timing chart for explaining change of a distribution movable valve. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display content of a 3rd symbol display apparatus, Fig.9 (a) shows the state in which the main decoration symbols were gathered, and FIG.9 (b) shows the state in which the sub-decoration symbols were gathered. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows payout control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball control process. It is a flowchart which shows a ball rental control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process performed by CPU of a sub control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal process performed by CPU of a sub control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening opening / closing process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the liquid crystal production execution management process by a sub control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing mode (big hit) display setting process by a sub control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the music start timing adjustment process by a sub-control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game process during a round by a sub control apparatus. 12 is a timing chart of a movable pattern suggestion effect example 1 showing a relationship between the movable timing of the sorting movable valve 409 in the big hit state and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect. It is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 2 in a big hit state. It is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 3 in a big hit state. It is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 4 in a big hit state. It is a timing chart which shows suggestion timing and an example of operation timing of the 2nd frame button. It is a timing chart following FIG. It is a timing chart following FIG. (A), (b) is a figure which shows the movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on a 3rd symbol display apparatus in a big hit state. (C), (d) is a figure which shows the movable pattern suggestion effect following FIG. (E)-(j) is a figure which shows the movable pattern suggestion effect following FIG. (K)-(p) is a figure which shows the movable pattern suggestion effect following FIG. It is a figure which shows the lower right game area | region of the game board in the middle of the movable pattern suggestion production in the big hit state being performed. It is a figure which shows a mode that the game ball discharged | emitted from the holding | maintenance apparatus shown in FIG. 40 enters a general winning opening. It is sectional drawing which shows the state which removed the decoration board from the holding | maintenance apparatus of FIG. It is sectional drawing which shows the state which removed the decoration board from the holding | maintenance apparatus of FIG. It is a figure which shows the lower right game area | region similar to FIG. It is a figure which shows a mode that the game ball discharged | emitted from the holding | maintenance apparatus shown in FIG. 44 is not inserted into a general winning opening. It is sectional drawing which shows the state which removed the decoration board from the holding | maintenance apparatus of FIG. It is sectional drawing which shows the state which removed the decoration board from the holding | maintenance apparatus of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display mode setting process by a sub control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the music start timing adjustment process in the reach production by a sub-control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process during reach production by a sub-control apparatus. It is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1 which shows the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve in reach | attainment effect, and the suggestion timing of a movable pattern suggestion effect. It is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 2 in the reach effect. It is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 3 in the reach effect. It is a timing chart of example 4 of a movable pattern suggestion effect in a reach effect. It is a figure which shows the movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on a 3rd symbol display apparatus during a reach effect. It is a figure which shows the lower right game area of the game board in the state where the game ball is put on hold. It is a figure which shows the lower right game area | region of the game board in the state where the game ball is not put on hold. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board in the state attached to the inner frame in Example 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the music start timing adjustment process in the reach | attainment effect in the normal game state by a sub-control apparatus. It is a table for determining the start timing of the music used for reach production, and the music used for reach production. It is a timing chart of the example of a movable pattern suggestion effect which shows the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve in the reach | attainment effect in a normal game state, and the suggestion timing of a movable pattern suggestion effect. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of Example 4 in the state attached to the inner frame. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of Example 5 in the state attached to the inner frame. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of Example 6 in the state attached to the inner frame. It is an enlarged view of the lower right game area in the game board of Example 6. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display mode setting process by a sub control apparatus. It is a flowchart of the lower limit start time setting process in the reach production by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the movable pattern suggestion production process by the full tank detection which a sub-control apparatus performs. It is a flowchart which shows the movable pattern suggestion effect process by the minimum start time which a sub-control apparatus performs. It is a flowchart which shows the music switching timing adjustment process by the full control which a sub-control apparatus performs. It is a flowchart which shows the music switch timing adjustment process by the minimum start time which a sub-control apparatus performs. It is a table which determines the time of adjustment production | presentation, and the music in a movable pattern suggestion production process. It is a table which determines a minimum start time and the music in which a movable pattern suggestion production process is in process. 12 is a timing chart of a movable pattern suggestion effect example 1 based on full tank detection during a reach effect in a normal gaming state. It is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 2 by the lower limit start time in the reach effect in a normal game state. It is a flowchart of an open / close mode (big hit) display setting process by the sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the movable pattern suggestion effect process by the lower limit start round which a sub-control apparatus performs. It is a flowchart which shows the music switch timing adjustment process in the minimum start round by a sub-control apparatus. It is a table for determining the time of adjustment production | presentation, and the music in a movable pattern suggestion production process. It is a timing chart of the example of a movable pattern suggestion production | presentation which shows the relationship between the movement timing of the distribution movable valve based on the full tank detection in a big hit production, and the suggestion timing of a movable pattern suggestion production. It is a timing chart following FIG. It is a flowchart of an open / close mode (big hit) display setting process by the sub-control device. It is a flowchart of the difficulty level selection process of the movable pattern suggestion effect by a sub-control device. (A)-(c) is a series of timing charts which show the timing of the movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409 and the suggestion image display. (A)-(c) is a series of timing charts which show the timing of the movable pattern different from FIG. 84 of a distribution movable valve, and a suggestion image display. (A), (b) is a figure which shows the movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on a 3rd symbol display apparatus in a big hit state. (A), (b) is a figure which shows the movable pattern suggestion effect following FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating normal processing by a main control device according to a ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart of the movable period change process of the distribution movable valve in the normal process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing mode (big hit) display setting process by the sub-control apparatus of Example 9. It is a table for determining adjustment time and the music in the movable pattern suggestion production process. It is a timing chart of the example of a movable pattern suggestion effect which shows the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve in 8 round big hit states, and the suggestion timing of a movable pattern suggestion effect. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control apparatus of Embodiment 10. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the movable pattern change process of the distribution movable valve in the normal process of FIG. It is a timing chart of the example of a movable pattern suggestion effect which shows the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve in the big hit state in a probability change state, and the suggestion timing of a movable pattern suggestion effect. FIG. 96 is a timing chart of an example of a movable pattern suggestion effect following FIG. 95. FIG. It is a table for determining the time of adjustment production, and the music in a movable pattern suggestion production. It is a table following FIG.

This specification also discloses an invention relating to the following gaming machines.
In the following embodiments, unless otherwise specified, the directions of up and down, left and right and front and rear (or back and front) will be described with reference to the state of the game board viewed from the front, that is, the front view of the game board.

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, and more particularly to a gaming machine including a holding device for holding a game ball.

  Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine equipped with a holding device for holding a game ball launched on a gaming board having a gaming area. In this type of gaming machine, when the player holds a game ball on the holding device, when the player operates the release operation button, the holding by the holding device is released and the game ball released from the holding device is a big hit. Some are configured to enter a general winning opening that does not give a lottery (see, for example, JP-A-2006-95235 (page 10, FIG. 2)).

However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, in the case of a conventional gaming machine, when a game ball is held in the holding device, the player operates the hold release button to put the held game ball into the general winning opening, but the hold is further performed. There is no merit of holding the game ball in the device. On the other hand, even if the game ball is not held in the holding device, the game ball that has been launched into the game area aiming for the starting prize opening etc. should directly enter the general prize opening, There is a problem that it may be bothersome to operate the hold release button every time a game ball is put on hold by the holding device.

  This is a problem that also occurs in a game machine of a type in which a game ball held in a holding device is entered into a start winning opening or a big winning opening.

  The invention according to the following (0) (A1) (B1), (C0), (C1), (D1) is made in view of such circumstances, and holds the game ball in the holding device. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the merit of this and improves the fun of gaming using a holding device.

(A1) a game board having a game area where game balls can flow down;
Starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
At least when a right-handed game is performed, a game ball that flows down the game area is provided at a position where the game ball can enter, a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and a game ball that is easier to enter than in the closed state Variable entry means that changes to an open state;
Entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting entry means;
Lottery means for performing lottery capable of determining whether or not to cause a special gaming state based on detection of a game ball by the ball detection means;
When the result of the lottery becomes a specific result, as the special gaming state, the variable pitching means executes a game that changes between the open state and the closed state a plurality of times,
A holding device that changes into a holding state in which at least a part of the game balls launched toward the variable ball entry means can be held and a released state in which the holding of the game balls is released;
A prize opening that is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter if the game ball is not released from the holding device in the game area, and a predetermined game value is obtained based on the game ball entering;
An operation means for receiving an operation of a player, including an operation of changing the hold device from the hold state to the release state;
A sorting operation is performed that changes between a first position that makes it difficult to win the game ball whose hold has been released to the winning opening and a second position that makes it easier to win the game ball whose hold has been released to the winning opening. A sorting member;
A sorting operation control means for controlling the sorting operation of the sorting member;
The special game includes an effect including a display of an operation request for requesting an operation of the operation means, wherein the operation request is displayed in accordance with a timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. An operation effect control means for controlling to display on the display means during the state.

  According to the invention described in (A1), the player operates the operation unit in accordance with the timing at which the operation request is displayed in the operation effect displayed on the display unit during the special game state. The holding device can be changed from the holding state to the released state in accordance with the timing at which the minute member comes to the second position. Thereby, the game ball discharged from the holding device at the timing when the operation request is displayed can easily win a prize opening through the sorting member at the second position. On the other hand, even if the operation means receives the player's operation at other times than this timing, the timing at which the holding device changes from the holding state to the released state does not match the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position. The game balls discharged from the holding device are difficult to win in the winning opening. Therefore, the player actively launches the game ball during the special game state, actively participates in the operation effect displayed on the display means during the special game state, and the operation request is displayed during the operation effect. The number of game balls held in the holding device in addition to the game value that can be enjoyed by the player based on the entry into the variable entry means during the special game state if the operation means can be operated well in time. It is possible to obtain a predetermined game value corresponding to the number of the game balls in the special game state by allowing the game balls to enter the winning opening. As a result, it is possible to increase the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device and improve the interest of the game using the holding device.

  In addition, the holding device can hold some of the game balls that are launched toward the variable ball entry means in the special game state. As a result, the player can hold some of the launched game balls on the holding device by continuing to fire the game balls toward the variable entry means during the special game state. In order to make a game ball held in the holding device win a prize other than the variable entry means, it is necessary to operate the operation means well in accordance with the timing when the operation request is displayed during the operation presentation. Therefore, it is possible to give technical intervention to winnings in other winning holes other than the variable pitching means in the special gaming state.

  Note that the right-handed game is an operation of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down in a right region of the game region when the game machine is viewed from the front.

(A2) In the gaming machine according to (A1),
A display effect control means for selecting a predetermined display effect from a plurality of patterns of display effects displayed on the display means during the special gaming state and displaying the selected display effect on the display means;
The operation effect is displayed on the display means as a part of the predetermined display effect.

  According to the invention described in (A2), the operation effect is displayed on the display unit as a part of the predetermined display effect selected from the display effects of a plurality of patterns displayed on the display unit during the special gaming state. Is done. Accordingly, the player has an opportunity (as an operation effect) to obtain a predetermined game value during the display effect displayed on the display means during the special game state. Can be improved.

(A3) In the gaming machine according to (A1) or (A2),
The gaming machine characterized in that the operation effect control means displays the operation effect on the display means on the basis that a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special gaming state.

  According to the invention described in (A3) above, for example, if the predetermined time is the minimum time required for the game ball to be held to the upper limit number or a number close to the upper limit number in the hold device, Since the player can participate in the operation effect in a state where the game is sufficiently held, it is possible to improve the interest of the game using the holding device.

(A4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A3),
The timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position is a plurality of times during one operation effect,
The operation effect control means displays the operation request a plurality of times in accordance with a timing at which the sorting member that is a plurality of times comes to the second position.

  According to the invention described in (A4), the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position is a plurality of times during one operation effect, and the timing at which the sorting member at the plurality of times comes to the second position. Since the operation effect in which the operation request is displayed a plurality of times is displayed on the display means, the player needs to operate the operation means a plurality of times in accordance with the timing at which the operation request is displayed a plurality of times. Thereby, a player can be made to participate actively in the operation effect displayed on a display means.

(A5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A4),
The display effect and the operation effect are effects accompanied by music reproduction,
A part of the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position matches the rhythm of the predetermined part of the music,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the display effect displays the operation request in accordance with a rhythm of a predetermined portion of the music.

  According to the invention described in (A5) above, the display effect and the operation effect are effects accompanied by music reproduction, and part of the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position is a rhythm of a predetermined part of music. The display effect displays an operation request in accordance with the rhythm of the music. This makes it possible for the player to actively participate in the operation effect displayed on the display means while making the player enjoy the act of operating the operation means in accordance with the operation request displayed in accordance with the rhythm of the music. it can.

(A6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A5),
The sorting operation control means controls the sorting operation of the sorting member so as to repeat the sorting operation at a constant movable period,
The operation effect control means, when the operation means receives a player's operation at the timing when the operation request is displayed, the timing at which the game ball that is released from the hold of the holding device reaches the sorting member, The gaming machine, wherein the operation effect is displayed on the display means so that the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position is matched.

  According to the invention described in (A6) above, the sorting member repeats the sorting operation at a constant movable period, but the operation means receives the player's operation at the timing when the operation request is displayed. Since the operation effect is displayed on the display means so that the timing at which the game ball whose hold is released from the holding device reaches the sorting member and the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position are matched, the operation request is made If the player operates the operation means at the displayed timing, the operation is such that the timing at which the game ball to be released from the holding device reaches the sorting member and the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position match. Production can be realized.

(A7) In the gaming machine according to (A6),
When it is a predetermined time from the timing when the hold of the holding device is released to the timing when the game ball discharged from the holding device by the release of the hold reaches the sorting member,
The gaming machine characterized in that the operation effect control means displays the operation request a predetermined time before the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position.

  According to the invention described in (A7), a game that is discharged from the holding device by releasing the hold from a timing at which the holding device is released from a predetermined time (a timing at which the holding device is released) from the timing at which the distribution member is in the second position. Since the operation request is displayed before the time when the ball reaches the sorting member), the holding device is released from the hold even though the operation means is operated by the player at the timing when the operation request is displayed. The inconvenience that the timing at which the game ball reaches the sorting member and the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position cannot be matched can be avoided.

(A8) In the gaming machine according to (A6) or (A7),
The operation effect control means adjusts the start timing of the display effect in the special gaming state.

  According to the invention described in (A8), the operation effect control means adjusts the start timing of the display effect in the special game state. In other words, the start timing of the display effect is determined according to the timing of establishment of the start condition based on the incoming ball detection by a predetermined incoming ball means, but (if there is a variable display hold, the variable display previously held However, since the movable member repeats the sorting operation with a certain movable period, when the display effect is simply started according to the timing of establishment of the start condition, When the operation means receives the player's operation at the timing when the operation request is displayed, the timing at which the game ball to be released from the hold of the holding device reaches the sorting member, and the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position May not fit. Thus, the operation effect control means can adjust the start timing of the display effect in the special gaming state so that both timings match, thereby avoiding the inconvenience that both timings do not match.

(A9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A8),
The gaming machine, wherein the sorting member is performed in such a manner that the sorting operation is difficult for a player to visually recognize.

  According to the invention described in (A9), since the sorting member is performed in such a manner that the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize, even if the operating means is operated while viewing the sorting member, It becomes difficult to release the hold of the game ball at the timing when the member changes from the first position to the second position.

(A10) In the gaming machine according to (A9),
The aspect in which the distribution operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is a mode in which the distribution member operates faster than the operation of other operation members.

  According to the invention described in (A10) above, the mode in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is a mode in which the sorting member operates faster than the operation of the other operating member. It becomes difficult for a player who is used to the operation speed to release the hold of the game ball at the timing when the sorting member changes from the first position to the second position.

(A11) In the gaming machine according to (A9) or (A10),
The mode in which the allocating operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is that the allocating member is easily viewed from the front side in the front view of the gaming machine on the front side of the gaming machine front view with respect to the holding device. A gaming machine, characterized in that a member for lowering is arranged.

  According to the invention described in (A11) above, the mode in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is from the front side in the front view of the gaming machine with respect to the holding device, from the front side in the front view of the gaming machine. This is a mode in which a member that reduces the visibility of the sorting member is arranged. This makes it difficult to visually recognize whether the sorting member located behind the member is in the first position or the second position. Therefore, the timing at which the sorting member is at the second position, and the timing at which the game ball is released from being held It becomes difficult to match.

(A12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A9) to (A11),
A mode in which the sorting operation is difficult for a player to visually recognize is a mode in which a member that reduces the ease of visual recognition operates.

  According to the invention described in (A12) above, the mode in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is a mode in which the member that reduces the ease of visual recognition operates, Since it is difficult to visually recognize whether the sorting member to be moved is the first position or the second position, it is difficult to match the timing at which the sorting member is at the second position with the timing at which the game ball is released from being held.

(A13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A9) to (A12),
The mode in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is that a light emitting means for emitting light from the back side of the sorting member is provided on the back side of the holding device in front view of the gaming machine, and the light emitting means emits light. A gaming machine characterized by the above.

  According to the invention described in (A13), the mode in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is the light emission that emits light from the back side of the sorting member on the back side of the holding device when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. And a light emitting means emits light. Thereby, it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether the position of the sorting member is the first position or the second position by the light emitted from the back side of the sorting member, and the timing when the sorting member is in the second position, and the game ball It becomes difficult to match the timing of releasing the hold.

(B1) a game board having a game area where game balls can flow down;
Starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
At least when a right-handed game is performed, a game ball that flows down the game area is provided at a position where the game ball can enter, a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and a game ball that is easier to enter than in the closed state Variable entry means that changes to an open state;
Entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting entry means;
Lottery means for performing lottery capable of determining whether or not to generate an advantageous gaming state based on detection of a game ball by the ball detection means;
In accordance with the result of the lottery by the lottery means, the symbols are displayed in a variation manner,
When the result of the lottery becomes a specific result, a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state occurs by performing a right-handed game as the advantageous gaming state,
A gaming machine that switches to a gaming state in which a left-handed game is performed after completion of the advantageous gaming state,
A holding device that changes into a holding state in which at least the game ball that is launched during the right-handed game can be held and a release state in which the holding of the game ball is released;
A prize opening that is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter if the game ball is not released from the holding device in the game area, and a predetermined game value is obtained based on the game ball entering;
An operation means for receiving an operation of a player, including an operation of changing the hold device from the hold state to the release state;
A sorting operation is performed that changes between a first position that makes it difficult to win the game ball whose hold has been released to the winning opening and a second position that makes it easier to win the game ball whose hold has been released to the winning opening. A sorting member;
A sorting operation control means for controlling the sorting operation of the sorting member;
An effect including a display of an operation request for requesting an operation of the operation means, wherein an operation effect in which the timing at which the operation request is displayed is matched with the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position is An operation effect control means for controlling to display on a display means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established in the gaming state in which the left-handed game is performed after the gaming state is finished.

  According to the invention described in (B1) above, if a player launches a game ball with a right hand strike in an advantageous game state, a part of the launched game balls is held in the holding device. Therefore, it is possible to hold the game ball on the holding device with an easy operation during the advantageous game state. Here, there is a case where a game ball held in the holding device remains even after switching to the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the advantageous game state. Even in such a case, the player operates the operation means in accordance with the timing at which the operation request is displayed in the operation effect displayed on the display means based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed. By operating the holding device, the holding device can be changed from the holding state to the released state in accordance with the timing when the sorting member comes to the second position. Thereby, the game ball discharged from the holding device at the timing when the operation request is displayed can easily win a prize opening through the sorting member at the second position. On the other hand, even if the operating means receives a player's operation at a timing other than the timing when the operation request is displayed, the timing at which the holding device changes from the holding state to the released state matches the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position. Because there is no, it becomes difficult to win a prize entrance. Therefore, if a player plays a right-handed game during the advantageous game state, even if there is a game ball held in the holding device after switching from the advantageous game state to the game state in which the left-handed game is performed, It is possible to actively participate in the operation effect displayed on the display means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in the gaming state to be performed, and to operate the operation means well in accordance with the timing when the operation request is displayed during the operation effect. If possible, in addition to the benefits that the player can enjoy during the advantageous game state, a predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls remaining in the holding device can be obtained in the game state in which the left-handed game after switching is performed. . As a result, it is possible to increase the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device and improve the interest of the game using the holding device.

  In addition, the player is likely to lose the willingness to continue the game after the advantageous gaming state ends, but the operation effect is displayed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the left-handed gaming state after the advantageous gaming state ends. If the player knows that there is a chance that a predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls held in the holding device by the operation effect can be obtained, the predetermined game value is also determined in the left-handed game state after the advantageous game state ends. Until the condition is satisfied, it is easy to cause a willingness to continue playing the game.

  Note that the right-handed game is an operation of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down in a right region of the game region when the game machine is viewed from the front. Left-handed gaming refers to performing an operation of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left side of the game area when the game machine is viewed from the front.

(B2) In the gaming machine according to (B1),
The advantageous game state is a special game state in which a special game in which the variable pitching means changes between the open state and the closed state is executed a plurality of times.

  According to the invention described in (B2) above, the advantageous game state is a special game state in which the special game in which the variable pitching means changes between the open state and the closed state is executed a plurality of times. In addition, it is possible to enhance the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device, and to improve the interest of the game using the holding device in the gaming state in which the left-handed game is performed after the special gaming state is finished.

(B3) In the gaming machine according to (B1) or (B2),
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a high-probability gaming state in which a probability that a lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result is increased after the special gaming state is ended.

  According to the invention described in (B3) above, the advantageous gaming state is a high-probability gaming state in which the probability that a lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result is increased after the above-described special gaming state ends. It is possible to increase the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device during the probability gaming state, and to improve the interest of the game using the holding device in the gaming state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the high probability gaming state. .

(B4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B3),
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a short time state in which the time for displaying the symbol variation is shortened after the special gaming state ends.

  According to the invention described in (B4) above, the advantageous game state is a short time state in which the time for displaying the symbol variation is shortened after the above-mentioned special game state is completed. It is possible to increase the merit of holding the ball and to improve the interest of the game using the holding device in the game state in which the left-handed game after the completion of the short-time state is performed.

(B5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B4),
At least a game ball that is launched during a right-handed game is provided at a position where it can enter, and the state changes between a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. Second starting entry means;
Second entry detection means for detecting a game ball entered into the second start entry means;
Second lottery means for performing lottery that can determine whether or not to cause the advantageous gaming state based on detection of a game ball by the second incoming ball detection means;
Game ball passage detecting means for detecting the passage of a game ball fired at least during a right-handed game;
A third lottery means for performing a third lottery on whether or not to put the second start ball entering means in the open state based on the detection of the game ball by the game ball passage detecting means;
In the advantageous game state, after the end of the special game state, when the result of the third lottery is a result of opening the second start ball entering means in the open state, the second start entry is performed in another game state. A time longer than the time when the ball means is in the open state or the number of times that the second start ball entering means is in the open state in another game state, or the second start ball entering means is in the open state. A gaming machine characterized by being in a gaming state.

  According to the invention described in (B5) above, the advantageous gaming state is determined when the result of the third lottery is the result of opening the second starting and entering means after the above-described special gaming state ends. In the gaming state, since the second starting ball entering means is in the gaming state in which the second starting ball entering means is open for a time (number of times) longer than the time (number of times) in which the second starting ball entering means is in the open state, It is possible to enhance the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device and to improve the interest of the game using the holding device in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the advantageous game state ends.

(B6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B5),
Based on the lottery result in the lottery means, provided with a variable display effect selecting means for selecting the predetermined variable display effect from a plurality of patterns of variable display effects that vary the design,
The predetermined condition is that the variable display effect selected in the gaming state in which the left-handed game is performed after the advantageous gaming state ends constitutes a part of a specific combination representing the specific result as a result of the lottery. A gaming machine including a predetermined reach effect performed by displaying a symbol and having a display time of the predetermined reach effect being at least longer than a display time of the operation effect.

  According to the invention described in (B6) above, in the gaming state in which a left-handed game after the end of the advantageous gaming state is performed, the symbols that constitute a part of the specific combination in which the variable display effect represents the specific result as a result of the lottery Since the operation effect is displayed on the display means when the display time of the reach effect is longer than at least the display time of the operation effect including the predetermined reach effect to be displayed, the left after the advantageous gaming state ends It is possible to make the player enjoy the display time of the reach effect in the gaming state where the hitting game is performed.

(B7) In the gaming machine according to (B6),
The reach effect includes a pattern including an expected effect having a predetermined height indicating that the advantageous game state is to be achieved, and an expectation level indicating that the advantageous game state is to be obtained as the expected effect. Including at least a pattern including a higher specific expectation effect as a component,
The predetermined condition is a pattern in which the predetermined reach effect included in the variable display effect selected in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the advantageous game state ends includes the specific expected effect as a component. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the invention described in (B7), the predetermined reach effect included in the variable display effect selected in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the advantageous game state is ended becomes the advantageous game state. Since the operation effect is displayed on the display means when the implied expectation is a pattern that includes a specific expected effect higher than the expected effect with a predetermined height, the left-handed after the end of the advantageous gaming state It is possible to make the player enjoy the display time of the reach effect including the specific expected effect in the gaming state where the game is performed.

(B8) In the gaming machine according to (B6) or (B7),
The predetermined condition is a second specifying result in which the lottery result in the lottery means is not the advantageous gaming state in the gaming state in which the left-handed game is performed after the advantageous gaming state ends, and the second specifying The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the variable display effect selected after the result includes the predetermined reach effect.

  According to the invention described in (B8) above, the lottery result in the lottery means is the second specified result that does not enter the advantageous gaming state in the gaming state in which the left-handed game after the advantageous gaming state ends, and the second specifying When the variable display effect selected after the result includes the above-described predetermined reach effect, the operation effect is displayed on the display means. Therefore, the lottery performed in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the advantageous game state is ended. If the lottery result in the means is a specific result that does not enter the advantageous gaming state, an opportunity to win the game ball held during the previous advantageous gaming state in the winning opening is given after the second specific result. By giving it during the reach performance, it is possible to reduce a feeling of disappointment with respect to the second specific result that is not in the advantageous gaming state.

(B9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B6) to (B8),
The reach effect includes a pattern including an expected effect having a predetermined height indicating that the advantageous game state is to be achieved, and an expectation level indicating that the advantageous game state is to be obtained as the expected effect. Including at least a pattern including a higher specific expectation effect as a component,
The predetermined condition is a second specifying result in which the lottery result in the lottery means is not the advantageous gaming state in the gaming state in which the left-handed game is performed after the advantageous gaming state ends, and the second specifying The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined reach production leading to the result is a pattern including the specific expected production.

  According to the invention described in (B9) above, the reach effect is in the advantageous game state with the pattern including the expected effect having the predetermined degree of expectation indicating that the advantageous game state is set to a predetermined height. In the gaming state in which a left-handed game is performed after the advantageous gaming state ends, the lottery result of the lottery means is advantageous gaming. The operation effect is displayed on the display means when the second specific result that is not in the state and the predetermined reach effect that reaches the second specific result is a pattern including the specific expected effect. Thereby, when the lottery result in the lottery means performed after the end of the advantageous gaming state is the second specific result that does not enter the advantageous gaming state even though it includes the specific expectation effect with high expectation, By giving an opportunity to win a game ball held during the previous advantageous gaming state to the winning opening during a predetermined reach production, the advantageous game state and the variable display production including the specific expected production are executed. It is possible to reduce the disappointment that the specific result is not.

(B10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B9),
A holding ball detecting means for detecting a game ball held in the holding device;
The operation effect control means is configured to display the operation effect on the display means based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied and the holding ball detection means determines that there is a game ball held in the holding device. A gaming machine characterized by display.

  According to the invention described in (B10), it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player by executing the operation effect even though there is no game ball held in the holding device.

(B11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B10),
A gaming machine having the configuration according to any one of (A2) to (A11).

  According to the invention described in (B11), the same effects as the gaming machine described in any of (A2) to (A11) are achieved.

(C0) a game board having a game area where game balls can flow down;
Starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
At least when a right-handed game is performed, a game ball that flows down the game area is provided at a position where the game ball can enter, a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and a game ball that is easier to enter than in the closed state Variable entry means that changes to an open state;
Entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting entry means;
Lottery means for performing lottery capable of determining whether or not to cause a special gaming state based on detection of a game ball by the ball detection means;
A gaming machine in which a predetermined display effect is displayed on a display means based on the result of the lottery being a predetermined result,
A holding device that changes between a holding state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be held and a release state in which the holding of the game ball is released;
A prize opening that is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter if the game ball is not released from the holding device in the game area, and a predetermined game value is obtained based on the game ball entering;
An operation means for receiving an operation of a player, including an operation of changing the hold device from the hold state to the release state;
A sorting operation is performed that changes between a first position that makes it difficult to win the game ball whose hold has been released to the winning opening and a second position that makes it easier to win the game ball whose hold has been released to the winning opening. A sorting member;
A sorting operation control means for controlling the sorting operation of the sorting member;
An effect including a display of an operation request for requesting an operation of the operation means, wherein an operation effect in which the timing at which the operation request is displayed is matched with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position is the predetermined An operation effect control means for controlling to display on the display means after elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the display effect.

  According to the invention described in (C0), the player operates the operation unit in accordance with the timing at which the operation request is displayed in the operation effect displayed on the display unit, so that the sorting member is the second. The holding device can be changed from the hold state to the release state in accordance with the timing of the position. Thereby, the game ball discharged from the holding device at the timing when the operation request is displayed can easily win a prize opening through the sorting member at the second position. On the other hand, even if the operating means receives a player's operation at a timing other than the timing when the operation request is displayed, the timing at which the holding device changes from the holding state to the released state matches the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position. Because there is no, it becomes difficult to win a prize entrance. Therefore, if the player can successfully operate the operation means in accordance with the timing at which the operation request is displayed during the operation effect, a predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls held in the holding device is not displayed. It can be obtained in the special gaming state. Further, the operation effect is displayed on the display means after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the predetermined display effect displayed based on the result of the lottery becoming the predetermined result. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control to determine the operation amount, and the memory usage for appropriately executing the operation effect can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to increase the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device and improve the interest of the game using the holding device.

  As the predetermined display effects described above, for example, a specific reach effect in the normal gaming state (for example, a super reach effect in which the reach effect period is longer than other reach effects), an effect during a jackpot round in a jackpot state (hereinafter, Jackpot effect) and display effects that indicate right-handed advantageous gaming states (probability change state, short-time state, etc.) (for example, effects that change the background color of the screen to a color different from the normal gaming state and special gaming state, and right-handed advantageous games) Display effect such as “Please turn right” to inform you of the condition). In such an example, the timing at which the operation request is displayed and the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position in the operation effect that starts after the elapse of a predetermined time at the start of the predetermined display effect. Adjustments are made to match.

(C1) a game board having a game area where game balls can flow down;
Starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
A variable ball that is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and changes between a closed state where the game ball is difficult to enter and an open state where the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. Means,
Entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting entry means;
Lottery means for performing lottery capable of determining whether or not to cause a special gaming state based on detection of a game ball by the ball detection means;
In accordance with the result of the lottery by the lottery means, the symbols are displayed in a variation manner,
When the result of the lottery becomes a specific result, as the specific gaming state, a gaming machine that repeatedly changes the variable pitching means between the open state and the closed state,
A holding device that changes into a holding state that can hold a game ball that is launched in a right-handed game in a non-special gaming state that is not at least the special gaming state, and a released state in which the holding of the game ball is released, and
A prize opening that is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter if the game ball is not released from the holding device in the game area, and a predetermined game value is obtained based on the game ball entering;
An operation means for receiving an operation of a player, including an operation of changing the hold device from the hold state to the release state;
A sorting operation is performed that changes between a first position that makes it difficult to win the game ball whose hold has been released to the winning opening and a second position that makes it easier to win the game ball whose hold has been released to the winning opening. A sorting member;
A sorting operation control means for controlling the sorting operation of the sorting member;
An effect including a display of an operation request for requesting an operation of the operation means, wherein an operation effect in which the timing at which the operation request is displayed is matched with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position is An operation effect control means for controlling to display on a display means in a special game state and during a specific variation display according to the result of the lottery.

  According to the invention described in (C1), the player operates the operation unit in accordance with the timing at which the operation request is displayed in the operation effect displayed on the display unit, so that the sorting member is the second. The holding device can be changed from the hold state to the release state in accordance with the timing of the position. Thereby, the game ball discharged from the holding device at the timing when the operation request is displayed can easily win a prize opening through the sorting member at the second position. On the other hand, even if the operating means receives a player's operation at a timing other than the timing when the operation request is displayed, the timing at which the holding device changes from the holding state to the released state matches the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position. Because there is no, it becomes difficult to win a prize entrance. In addition, the player plays a right-handed game during the non-special game state, and is active in the operation effect displayed on the display means during the non-special game state and during the specific variation display according to the lottery result. If the operation means can be operated well in accordance with the timing at which the operation request is displayed during the operation presentation, a predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls held in the holding device is obtained. Since it can be obtained in the state, the player's willingness to participate in the game during the non-special game state can be increased. As a result, it is possible to increase the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device and improve the interest of the game using the holding device.

  In the non-special gaming state, not only the normal gaming state where the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specified result is the normal probability but also the result of the lottery by the lottery means after the special gaming state ends is the specified result. The high probability gaming state in which the probability of becoming higher than the normal gaming state and the short time state in which the time for the variable display is shortened are also included.

(C2) In the gaming machine according to (C1),
The specific variation display is a specific reach effect performed by displaying symbols constituting a part of a specific combination representing the specific result as a result of the lottery, and at least more than a display time of the operation effect. A gaming machine characterized by a specific reach effect in which the change display is performed for a long time.

  According to the invention described in (C2) above, the specific variation display is a specific reach effect in which the variable display is performed at least for a time longer than the display time of the operation effect. Thereby, by making a player participate in a game using a holding device that is performed during a specific reach production, it is possible to reduce the player from getting bored with a reach production with a long variation time such as a specific reach production.

(C3) In the gaming machine according to (C2),
The operation effect control means performs a right-handed notification for notifying a player that the right-handed game is performed during the specific variation display, and after the right-handed notification and during the specific variation display, The game machine, wherein the operation effect is displayed on the display means.

  According to the invention described in (C3), the operation effect is displayed on the display unit by the operation effect control unit after the operation effect control unit performs the right stroke notification during the specific fluctuation display by the right stroke notification unit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the missed opportunity for the player to hold the game ball in the holding device during the specific variation display.

(C4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (C1) to (C3),
The gaming machine is configured such that a game ball launched in the right-handed game is more easily held in the holding device in the non-special game state than in the specific game state.

  According to the invention described in (C4) above, the game ball fired in the right-handed game is more easily held in the holding device in the non-special game state than in the specific game state due to the configuration of the game board. In the special game state, it is possible to make the player actively play a right-handed game during a specific variation display.

(C5) In the gaming machine according to (C4),
The gaming machine is provided with a guide member that guides the game ball launched in the right-handed game to the holding device in the non-special game state.

  According to the invention described in (C5) above, since the game ball launched in the right-handed game in the non-special game state is guided to the holding device by the guide member provided on the game board, the nail adjustment is performed to the holding device. More securely than in the case of guiding, a game ball launched in a right-handed game in a non-special game state can be guided to the holding device.

(C6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (C1) to (C3),
The game board is configured such that a game ball fired in the right-handed game is more easily held by the holding device when the specific fluctuation display is being performed than when the specific fluctuation display is different from the specific fluctuation display. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the invention described in (C6) above, a game ball fired in a right-handed game is held in a specific variation display rather than a variation display different from a specific variation display depending on the configuration of the game board. Since it is easy to be put on hold by the device, the player can play other right-handed games in a non-special game state while the player is playing a right-handed game during a specific game. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of games that deviate from the original game of playing right-handed games.

(C7) In the gaming machine according to (C6), the gaming board is provided with a guide member that guides the game ball fired in the right-handed game to the holding device during the specific variation display. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the invention described in (C7) above, a game ball launched in a right-handed game during a specific variation display is guided to a holding device by a guide member provided on the game board. It is possible to guide the game ball fired in the right-handed game to the holding device more reliably than when guiding to the device. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of performing a right-handed game while aiming at the guide member during a specific variation display.

(D1) a game board having a game area where game balls can flow down;
A holding device that changes between a holding state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be held and a release state in which the holding of the game ball is released;
Detecting means for detecting a game ball held in the holding device;
A prize opening that is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter if the game ball is not released from the holding device in the game area, and a predetermined game value is obtained based on the game ball entering;
An operation means for receiving an operation of a player, including an operation of changing the hold device from the hold state to the release state;
A sorting operation is performed that changes between a first position that makes it difficult to win the game ball whose hold has been released to the winning opening and a second position that makes it easier to win the game ball whose hold has been released to the winning opening. A sorting member;
A sorting operation control means for controlling the sorting operation of the sorting member;
A means for controlling a display effect including an operation effect in which an operation request image for requesting an operation of the operation means is displayed, and when the game ball held in the holding device is detected by the detecting means, Display effect control means for controlling the display means to display the operation effect that matches the timing at which the operation request image is displayed with the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position. To play.

  According to the invention described in (D1), the player operates the operation unit in accordance with the timing at which the operation request is displayed in the operation effect displayed on the display unit, so that the sorting member is the second. The holding device can be changed from the hold state to the release state in accordance with the timing of the position. Thereby, the game ball discharged from the holding device at the timing when the operation request is displayed can easily win a prize opening through the sorting member at the second position. On the other hand, even if the operating means receives a player's operation at a timing other than the timing when the operation request is displayed, the timing at which the holding device changes from the holding state to the released state matches the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position. Because there is no, it becomes difficult to win a prize entrance. Therefore, in order for the player to display the display effect including the above-described operation effect, the player needs to keep firing the game ball until the game ball is held on the holding device and detected by the detecting means. It is possible to reduce stoppages that interrupt the launching of game balls. As a result, it is possible to increase the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device and improve the interest of the game using the holding device.

(D2) In the gaming machine according to (D1),
An upper limit number determining means for determining whether or not a holding upper limit number of game balls are held in the holding device based on detection of the game balls by the detecting means;
The production control means matches the timing at which the operation request image is displayed with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position when it is determined that the upper limit number of game balls are held. The gaming machine is controlled to display the operation effect on the display means.

  According to the invention described in (D2) above, when the operation effect is determined by the effect control means by the effect control means when the upper limit number determination means determines that the upper limit number of game balls are held in the holding device. Since the operation effect is displayed in accordance with the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position, the operation effect is displayed until only the game balls that are less than the upper limit number of hold are held. It is possible to reduce the complexity of the player.

(D3) In the gaming machine according to (D2).
A lower limit timing determination means for determining whether or not the execution time of the display effect has reached a lower limit timing for starting the operation effect;
The effect control means, when it is determined that the upper limit number of game balls are held again until it is determined that the execution time of the display effect has reached the lower limit timing, the operation request image A game machine characterized by controlling the display means to display a new operation effect in accordance with the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position.

  According to the invention described in (D3) above, when it is determined that the upper limit number of game balls are held again until it is determined that the execution time of the display effect has reached the lower limit timing, an operation request is issued. Since a new operation effect is displayed on the display means in accordance with the timing at which the image is displayed at the timing when the sorting member comes to the second position, the upper limit number of game balls are held during the display effect execution period. Even after the operation effect is displayed, until the execution time of the display effect reaches the lower limit timing, the upper limit number of game balls are held again and a new operation effect is displayed (as a result, a new game value is displayed). The player can actively launch a game ball.

(D4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D3),
Lower limit timing determination means for determining whether or not the execution time of the display effect has reached a lower limit timing for starting the operation effect;
Second determination means for determining whether or not at least the holding lower limit number of gaming balls is held in the holding device based on detection of the game balls by the detecting means;
The operation control image is displayed when the display control means determines that at least the holding lower limit number of game balls are held before it is determined that the execution time of the display effect has reached the lower limit timing. The gaming machine is controlled so as to display the operation effect in accordance with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position on the display means.

  According to the invention described in (D4), when it is determined that at least the holding lower limit number of game balls are held until it is determined that the execution time of the display effect reaches the lower limit timing, the effect control is performed. By the means, an operation effect that matches the timing at which the operation request image is displayed with the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position is displayed on the display means. Thereby, even if it is a case where it is determined by the first determination means that the number of holding upper limit game balls is not held in the holding device, at least the holding lower limit number is reached until the execution time of the display effect reaches the lower limit timing. When it is determined that the game ball is held, an operation effect that matches the timing at which the operation request image is displayed with the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position is displayed on the display means. Although the game ball is held in the holding device, it is possible to reduce the attenuation of the game will due to the fact that the operation effect is not displayed only because the holding upper limit number is not reached.

(D5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D4),
The operation effect includes a first operation effect in which the operation request image is displayed in a first operation mode, and a second operation mode in which the operation request image is displayed in a second operation mode that is easier for a player to operate than the first operation mode. 2 operation effects at least,
At least a difficulty level selection display means for displaying on the display means a selection image capable of selecting which operation effect to display between the first operation effect and the second operation effect;
The effect control means displays on the display means an operation effect selected during display of the selected image by the difficulty level selection display means.

  According to the invention described in (D5), the operation effects are a first operation effect in which an operation request image is displayed in the first operation mode, and a second operation mode that is easier for the player to operate than the first operation mode. A selection image that includes at least a second operation effect on which an operation request image is displayed and that can select at least one of the first operation effect and the second operation effect to be displayed by the difficulty level selection display unit. Is displayed on the display means, and the operation effect selected during display of the selected image is displayed on the display means by the effect control means. Therefore, a player who does not like difficult operations may select the second operation effect. A player who is not able to do so can select the first operation effect. In this way, an operation effect according to the player's preference can be provided.

(D6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D5),
The sorting operation of the sorting member has a plurality of types of movable cycles including a first movable cycle and a second movable cycle having different cycles,
The sorting operation control means includes a movable period changing means for changing a movable period from the first movable period to the second movable period,
The display effect control means matches the timing at which the operation request image is displayed with the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position according to the type of the movable period changed by the period changing means. A gaming machine, wherein the operation effect is displayed.

  According to the invention described in (D6), the sorting operation of the sorting member has a plurality of types of movable cycles including a first movable cycle and a second movable cycle having different cycles, and the movable cycle changing means Even when the movable cycle is changed from the first movable cycle to the second movable cycle, the distribution member is set to the second position at the timing when the operation request image is displayed according to the type of the changed movable cycle. An operation effect in accordance with the timing to come is displayed by the display effect control means. Thereby, it is more difficult to identify the operation timing of the movable member than when the distributing operation is performed in the same movable cycle.

(D7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D6),
The sorting operation of the sorting member has a plurality of types of movable patterns including a first movable pattern and a second movable pattern having different timings for changing to the first position and the second position;
The sorting operation control means includes a movable pattern changing unit that changes a movable pattern from the first movable pattern to the second movable pattern,
The display effect control means matches the timing at which the operation request image is displayed with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position in accordance with the type of the movable pattern changed by the movable pattern changing unit. A gaming machine characterized by displaying the operation effect.

  According to the invention described in (D7), the sorting operation of the sorting member includes a plurality of types including a first movable pattern and a second movable pattern having different timings for changing between the first position and the second position. Even when the movable pattern is changed from the first movable pattern to the second movable pattern by the movable pattern changing unit, an operation request image is displayed according to the type of the changed movable pattern. An operation effect that matches the timing with the timing when the sorting member comes to the second position is displayed by the display effect control means. As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult to identify the operation timing of the movable member than when the distributing operation is performed with the same movable pattern.

(D8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D7),
The sorting operation control means repeats the sorting operation at a predetermined movable period at least before the operation effect is started,
The display effect control means determines the timing at which the operation request image is displayed from when the detection means detects a game ball held on the holding device until the operation effect is started. An adjustment effect is performed to adjust the dividing member to match the timing at which the minute member comes to the second position,
The display effect control means has, as the adjustment effect, a plurality of types of adjustment effects with different lengths of time during which the adjustment effect is executed, and is held by the holding device by the detecting means for the predetermined movable period. A gaming machine, characterized in that it controls the display means to display the adjustment effects of the different lengths determined according to the timing at which a game ball is detected.

  According to the invention described in (D8), since the sorting operation control unit repeats the sorting operation at a predetermined movable cycle at least before the operation effect is started, in the middle of the predetermined movable cycle, When the timing at which a game ball held on the holding device is detected (that is, the timing at which the operation effect in the display effect is started) arrives, the display effect control means is a game held on the holding device by the detecting means. An adjustment effect is performed to adjust the timing at which the operation request image is displayed after the detection of the sphere until the operation effect is started to match the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position. The display effect control means has, as this adjustment effect, a plurality of types of adjustment effects with different lengths of time during which the adjustment effect is executed, and a game ball held on the holding device by the detection means for a predetermined movable cycle is provided. Adjustment effects having different lengths determined according to the detected timing are displayed on the display means. Thereby, even when the timing at which the game ball held by the holding device is detected (that is, the timing at which the operation effect in the display effect is started) arrives in the middle of the predetermined movable cycle, the operation request image It is possible to adjust so that the timing at which is displayed and the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position are not shifted.

(D9) In the gaming machine according to (D8),
The display effect control means has a plurality of types of the adjustment effects having a length shorter than the length of time for which the operation effect is executed.

  According to the invention described in (D9) above, since the display effect control means has a plurality of types of adjustment effects having a length shorter than the length of time during which the operation effect is executed, the timing at which the operation request image is displayed. In order to store a plurality of types of adjustment effect images in the memory in order to match the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position, a plurality of types of operation effect images are stored in the memory. The amount of memory used can be reduced as compared with the case of making it.

(D10) In the gaming machine according to (D8),
The display effect control means has a plurality of types of adjustment effects having an image with a smaller amount of information than an image for displaying the operation effect.

  According to the invention described in (D10), since there are a plurality of types of adjustment effects having an image with a smaller amount of information than the image for displaying the operation effects, the length of the adjustment effects is the same as the length of the operation effects. Even when the operation request image is displayed, in order to match the timing at which the operation request image is displayed with the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position, images for adjusting effects of multiple types (for example, still images) are stored in memory In this case, the amount of memory used can be reduced as compared with the case where images (for example, moving images) having a plurality of types of operation effects are stored in the memory.

(D11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D7),
The sorting operation control means repeats the sorting operation at a predetermined movable period at least before the operation effect is started,
The display effect control means has a plurality of types of operation effects with different lengths of time during which the operation effect is executed, and detects a game ball held in the holding device by the detection means for the predetermined movable period. The gaming machine is controlled so as to display the operation effect of the different length determined according to the timing to be displayed on the display means.

  According to the invention described in (D11), the distribution operation control means repeats the distribution operation at a predetermined movable period at least before the operation effect is started, and the display effect control means has the operation effect. There are a plurality of types of operation effects with different lengths of time to be executed, and operation effects with different lengths determined according to the timing at which a game ball held in the holding device is detected by the detection means for a predetermined movable period. Since it is displayed on the display means, even when the timing at which the game ball held on the holding device is detected (that is, the timing when the operation effect in the display effect is started) arrives in the middle of the predetermined movable period. The timing at which the operation request image is displayed and the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position can be adjusted.

(D12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D8) to (D11),
The gaming machine, wherein the sorting operation control means executes the sorting operation in the predetermined movable period in a manner that is difficult for a player to visually recognize.

  According to the invention described in (D12), the sorting operation control means executes the sorting operation in a predetermined movable cycle in a manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Even when the sorting operation is repeated in the movable period of the above, the player decodes the movable period of the sorting operation and, based on the timing obtained by decoding, matches the timing when the sorting member comes to the second position. It can be reduced that a predetermined game value is obtained by operating the operating means.

(E1) a game board having a game area where game balls can flow down;
Starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
At least when a right-handed game is performed, a game ball that flows down the game area is provided at a position where the game ball can enter, a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and a game ball that is easier to enter than in the closed state Variable entry means that changes to an open state;
Entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting entry means;
Lottery means for performing lottery capable of determining whether or not to cause a special gaming state based on detection of a game ball by the ball detection means;
A gaming machine in which a predetermined display effect is displayed on a display means based on the result of the lottery being a predetermined result,
A holding device that changes between a holding state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be held and a release state in which the holding of the game ball is released;
A prize opening that is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter if the game ball is not released from the holding device in the game area, and a predetermined game value is obtained based on the game ball entering;
An operation means for receiving an operation of a player, including an operation of changing the hold device from the hold state to the release state;
A sorting operation is performed that changes between a first position that makes it difficult to win the game ball whose hold has been released to the winning opening and a second position that makes it easier to win the game ball whose hold has been released to the winning opening. A sorting member;
An operation effect control means for controlling an operation effect including an operation request display requesting an operation of the operation means to be displayed on the display means during the display of the predetermined display effect;
A distribution operation control means for controlling the distribution operation of the distribution member at a timing not synchronized with a start timing of the predetermined display effect and the operation effect;
The operation effect control means adjusts at least one of the predetermined display effect and the operation effect so that the timing at which the operation request is displayed matches the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the invention described in (E1), the holding device changes between a holding state in which the game ball flowing down the game area can be held and a released state in which the holding of the game ball is released. A winning opening from which a predetermined game value is obtained based on a game ball entering is provided at a position in the game area where it is difficult to enter a game ball that has not been released from the holding device. The operation means receives a player's operation including an operation of changing the holding device from the holding state to the released state. The sorting member is a swinging position that changes between a first position that makes it difficult to win a game ball that has been released from being held in the winning opening, and a second position that makes it easier to win a game ball that has been released from being held in the winning opening. Minute operation is performed. The operation effect control means controls the display means to display the operation effect including the display of the operation request for requesting the operation of the operation means while the predetermined display effect is being displayed. The distribution operation control means controls the distribution operation of the distribution member at a timing not synchronized with the start timing of the predetermined display effect and the operation effect. Here, if no measure is taken, there is a concern that the timing at which the operation request is displayed deviates from the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position. Therefore, the operation effect control means adjusts at least one of the predetermined display effect and the operation effect so that the timing when the operation request is displayed matches the timing when the sorting member comes to the second position.

  As a result, the player holds the time at which the sorting member comes to the second position by operating the operation means in accordance with the timing at which the operation request is displayed in the operation effect displayed on the display means. The device can be changed from the hold state to the release state. In addition, the game ball discharged from the holding device at the timing when the operation request is displayed is likely to win a winning opening through the sorting member at the second position. On the other hand, even if the operating means receives a player's operation at a timing other than the timing when the operation request is displayed, the timing at which the holding device changes from the holding state to the released state matches the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position. Because there is no, it becomes difficult to win a prize entrance. Therefore, if the player can successfully operate the operation means in accordance with the timing at which the operation request is displayed during the operation effect, the player can obtain a predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls held in the holding device. Can do. As a result, it is possible to increase the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device and improve the interest of the game using the holding device.

(E2) In the gaming machine according to (E1),
The operation effect control means provides the display means with an adjustment effect that adjusts the start timing of the operation effect so that the timing at which the operation request is displayed matches the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position. A gaming machine characterized by being controlled to display.

  According to the invention described in (E2), the timing at which the operation request is displayed can be matched with the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position, and the predetermined display effect is provided by the adjustment effect in addition to the operation effect. Can improve interest in

(E3) In the invention described in (E1),
The operation effect control means adjusts the length of the operation effect so that the timing at which the operation request is displayed matches the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. .

  According to the invention described in (E3) above, the timing at which the operation request is displayed can be matched with the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position, and the operation can be performed according to the length of the operation effect. The interest for a predetermined display effect including the effect can be improved.

(E4) In the invention according to any one of (E1) to (E3),
A gaming machine comprising the configuration according to at least one of (A1) to (D12).

  According to the invention according to (E4), in the invention according to any one of (E1) to (E3), the same effect as the invention according to at least one of (A1) to (D12) described above Can be played.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 30 attached to the inner frame 12, and FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the holding device 400 FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of a lower right game area 30a3 of the game board 30 shown in FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the decorative plate 413 is removed from the holding device 400 shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view around the sorting movable valve 409 shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is a timing chart for explaining the transition of the distribution movable valve 409. FIG. 7 is a back view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. 9A and 9B are explanatory diagrams showing the display contents of the third symbol display device, in which FIG. 9A shows a state in which the main decorative symbols are aligned, and FIG. 9B shows a state in which the sub-decorative symbols are aligned. .

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and is fixed to a game island of a game hall (hole), and one side portion (for example, a front surface) of the outer frame 11. An inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11 with the left-hand side as viewed as an opening / closing axis, and an inner frame with one side portion (for example, the left-hand side as viewed from the front) of the inner frame 12 as an opening / closing axis. And a front frame set 14 that can be freely opened and closed.

  The outer frame 11 is formed in a rectangular shape as a whole by a wooden plate material, and each plate material is assembled by a detachable fastener such as a machine screw. In the present embodiment, for example, the outer dimension of the outer frame 11 is 809 mm (inner dimension 771 mm), and the outer dimension in the left and right direction is 518 mm (inner dimension 480 mm). The outer frame 11 may be made of a light metal such as resin or aluminum.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the inner frame 12 can be broadly divided into a lower tray unit 13 attached to the lowermost portion thereof, and a vertical opening on the left side of the inner frame 12 in a range above the lower tray unit 13. A front frame set 14 that is attached to be openable and closable around an axis is provided, and a game board 30 (see FIG. 2) that is detachably attached to a resin base (not shown) whose outer shape is rectangular.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the lower plate unit 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 by a fastener such as a screw. On the front side of the lower plate unit 13, a lower plate 15, a ball removal lever 17, a game ball launching handle 18, and a sound output port 24 are provided. The lower tray 15 as a ball receiving tray is provided at the substantially central portion of the lower tray unit 13, and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 can be stored in the lower tray 15. The ball removal lever 17 is for removing a game ball in the lower plate 15. By moving the ball removal lever 17 to the left in FIG. 1, a predetermined position on the bottom surface of the lower plate 15 is opened, The game balls stored in the dish 15 can be pulled out downward through the opening on the bottom surface of the lower dish 15. The game ball launching handle 18 is disposed so as to protrude to the front side on the right side of the lower plate 15. In accordance with the operation of the game ball launching handle 18 by the player, the game ball launching device 38 drives the game ball toward a game board 30 described later. The game ball launching device 38 includes, for example, a game ball launching handle 18 and a launching device 229 (see FIG. 8). The sound output port 24 is an output port for outputting sound from a speaker provided in the lower plate unit 13 or on the back surface.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 is attached to the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. It can be opened to the front side with an axial center.

  As shown in FIG. 1, an upper plate 19 as a receiving tray for game balls is integrally provided at the lower portion of the front frame set 14 (above the lower plate 15). Here, the upper plate 19 is a ball receiving tray for temporarily storing the game balls and guiding them to the game ball launching device 38 while aligning them in a line. The front frame set 14 is formed with a substantially elliptical window 101 so that most of the game area 30a (see FIG. 2) of the game board 30 can be viewed from the outside. Specifically, the window portion 101 is a substantially oval shape whose substantially central portion on the left and right sides is curved relatively gently as compared with the upper and lower sides, and has a hollow in the center. A substantially elliptical glass plate 137 is attached to the hollow portion. This glass plate 137 has a double glass structure. The substantially central portion of the window 101 may be linear, and the glass plate 137 may be matched to the shape. The glass plate 137 is not limited to glass, and any material may be used as long as it is a transparent plate having a predetermined strength.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 includes a first frame button 20 and a second frame button 21 that receive an operation instruction (for example, a pressing instruction) by a player at a position on the lower left side of the upper plate 19. It has. As shown in FIG. 8, the first frame button 20 is connected to the sub-control device 262. The second frame button 21 is connected to the main control device 261. For example, when a predetermined operation valid condition is satisfied, the operation of the first frame button 20 becomes valid, and the screen display of the third symbol display device 42 is changed or the output sound is changed by pressing the frame button 20 or the like. The player can actively participate in the game, such as changing the lamp display. The second frame button 21 has a shape imitating a drum hitting surface, and is used for an operation of changing the holding device 400 from the holding state to the release state as described later.

  In addition, the front frame set 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the window portion 101 (for example, a corner portion) on the front side. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing and controlling the light emission mode such as lighting and blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. For example, at the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 containing a light emitting means such as an LED is provided symmetrically, and at the center of the annular illumination portion 102 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, Similarly, a central illumination unit 103 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, the central illumination unit 103 functions as a jackpot lamp, and lights and blinks when the jackpot is informed that the jackpot is being hit. In addition, on the left and right sides of the central illumination unit 103, there are provided a prize ball lamp 105 that is lit during the payout of a prize ball and an error display lamp 106 that is lit when a predetermined error occurs. Further, a small window 107 made of a transparent resin is provided so as to be adjacent to the lower end portion of the annular illumination portion 102 so that a part of the inner frame 12 surface, the game board 30 surface, or the like can be visually recognized. Since the predetermined portion of the small window 107 is flat, the certificate paper or the like attached to the lower right corner of the game board 30 can be suitably read from the flat portion of the small window 107 by a machine.

  In addition, a ball lending operation unit 120 is disposed below the window unit 101, and the ball lending operation unit 120 is provided with a ball lending button 121, a return button 122, and a frequency display unit 123. When the ball lending operation unit 120 is operated with a bill or a card inserted in a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, a game ball is lent according to the operation. Done. The ball lending button 121 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 19 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. The frequency display unit 123 displays remaining amount information such as a card. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 120 is not necessary for a pachinko machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine. Therefore, a decorative seal or the like is attached to the installation portion of the ball rental operation unit 120. Thereby, the common use of the lending operation unit of the pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be achieved.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 is made of a quadrangular plywood and is attached in a state in which the peripheral edge thereof is in contact with the back side of a resin base (not shown) of the inner frame 12. A partial game area 30a is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the resin-based substantially circular window portion 101 (glass plate 137) shown in FIG. In FIG. 2, only the portion corresponding to the size of the game board 30 in the inner frame 12 is shown, and the other areas are not shown.

The game board 30 includes a general winning port 31a, a general winning port 31b, a variable winning device 32, a first starting port 33a (for example, a navel), a first starting port 33b (for example, an electric chew and an operation chucker), and a second starting unit. An opening 34 (for example, a through gate), a variable display unit 35 and the like are provided. These parts are respectively disposed in each through hole formed by router processing in the game board 30 and are attached from the front side of the game board 30 with wood screws or the like. A game ball enters the aforementioned general winning opening 31a, 31b, variable winning device 32, and first start opening 33a, 33b, the detected ball is detected by a detection switch described later, and based on the output of the detection switch. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 (or the lower plate 15). The first start port 33a is provided with a ball detection switch 31c. The first start port 33b is provided with a ball detection switch 31d. A passage detection switch 34a is provided at the second start port 33b. In addition, the entrance into the first start openings 33a and 33b is a start condition for the first symbol display device 40 and the third symbol display device 42 to start the variable display of the first symbol and the third symbol. Yes. The passage to the second starting port 34 is a starting condition for the second symbol display device 41 to start the variable display of the second symbol.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that have not entered the various winning devices or the like pass through the out port 36 in a ball discharge path (not shown). You will be guided to the direction. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 30 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls.

  The variable display device unit 35 passes through the first symbol display device 40 that variably displays the first symbol (for example, a special symbol) and the second trigger port 34, with a winning at the first start ports 33a and 33b as a trigger. As a trigger, the second symbol display device 41 for variably displaying the second symbol (for example, a normal symbol), and the winning symbol for the first start ports 33a and 33b as a trigger for variably displaying the third symbol (for example, a decorative symbol). And a third symbol display device 42. The first symbol, the second symbol, and the third symbol are identifications that allow the player to identify whether or not the result of the variable display of the first symbol, the second symbol, and the third symbol is a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Information.

  The first symbol display device 40 includes, for example, a plurality (two in this embodiment) of two-color light emitting type LEDs (light emitting diodes) 40a and 40b, and a hold indicating the number of hold of the variable display on the LEDs 40a and 40b. And a lamp 40c. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the first start ports 33a and 33b is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of times that the game ball is held is lit and displayed by the hold lamp 40c. Note that the hold lamp 40c may be configured such that a hold display is performed on a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 42. The LEDs 40a and 40b can emit light in red and blue, for example. The first symbol display device 40 generates a variable display state of the first symbol (in the present embodiment, the emission color mode of each LED 40a, 40b) by alternately changing the emission color of each LED 40a, 40b. For example, in the case of a light emitting mode in which both LEDs 40a and 40b stop in a blue light emitting state, it indicates that the first special gaming state (for example, a normal big hit state) has been won. Further, when the LED 40a is stopped in the blue light emitting state and the LED 40b is stopped in the red light emitting state, it indicates that the player has won the second special gaming state (for example, the time and big hit state). In addition, in the case of the light emission mode in which both LEDs 40a and 40b are stopped in the red light emission state, it indicates that the third special game state (for example, the probability variation big hit state) has been won. In addition, in the case of the light emitting mode in which the LED 40a stops in the red light emitting state and the LED 40b stops in the blue light emitting state, it indicates that the LED 40a is disengaged (the player has been lost in the special gaming state).

  In addition, as this 1st symbol display apparatus 40, you may employ | adopt the single LED of the type which can light-emit at least 3 colors or more, and by performing light emission of each color alternately, the 1st symbol is displayed. When the LED stops in the light emission state of the first color, a probable big hit is indicated, and when the LED stops in the light emission state of the second color, a normal big hit is indicated, and the LED emits light of the third color. If it stops in a state, it may indicate a time and big hit, and if the LED stops in a light emission state of the fourth color, it may indicate a disconnection.

  The second symbol display device 41 includes, for example, a display unit 41a on which “○” is drawn for the second symbol, a display unit 41b on which “x” is drawn for the second symbol, and a holding lamp 41c. When the game ball passes through the second starting port 34, for example, the display symbols (ordinary symbols) displayed by the display units 41a and 41b change, and when the change display stops at a predetermined symbol, the lower side One start port 33b is configured to be in an activated state (opened) for a predetermined time. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the second start port 34 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of times the game ball is held is lit on the hold lamp 41c. The display units 41a and 41b have LEDs (light emitting diodes) inside thereof, and are configured to be variably displayed by switching the light emission of the LEDs (or lighting of the lamps).

  The 3rd symbol display apparatus 42 is comprised, for example with the liquid crystal display device, and the display content is controlled by the display control apparatus 45 mentioned later. On the third symbol display device 42, for example, as shown in FIG. 9, which will be described later, three decorative symbol rows L, M, and R of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each of the decorative symbol rows L, M, R is composed of a plurality of decorative symbols, and these decorative symbols are variably displayed on the third symbol display device 42 so as to be scrolled for each of the decorative symbol rows L, M, R. It has become so. The third symbol display device 42 can also display a special game moving image that operates an image of a predetermined character or the like during a period in which the opening / closing operation member changes between an open state and a closed state. In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 (liquid crystal display device) includes, for example, a large 9.3 inch size liquid crystal display. The variable display device unit 35 is provided with a center frame 47 so as to surround the third symbol display device 42. The above-described third symbol display device 42 corresponds to the image display device in the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win, and is in an open state in which a game ball is easy to win in the case of a big win and a normal closed state. It is operated repeatedly. As described above, a state in which the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly operated in an open state and a normal closed state in the case of a big win is called a special game state (for example, a big win state). Since the ball enters (wins) and a lot of game balls are paid out for the winning, the game state is advantageous to the player.

  More specifically, when a game ball wins the first start opening 33a, 33b, the two LEDs 40a, 40b of the first symbol display device 40 are displayed in a variable manner, and the display of the LEDs 40a, 40b after the change stop is preset. The special gaming state occurs when the combination of the light emission modes is achieved.

  In this embodiment, the variable prize winning device 32 has a door member 32b for opening and closing the big prize opening 32a, and when the normal big hit state or the probable big hit is won, the door member 32b falls forward and is predetermined. The game ball is configured to be in an open state so that the game ball can be easily won. Specifically, the variable prize winning device 32 sets a predetermined number of times (the number corresponding to the number of big hit rounds), with the passage of a predetermined time or a predetermined number of winnings in the open state as one round. ) Open repeatedly. For example, one round is set to end (the door member 32b is closed) when 30 seconds have elapsed from the opening of the door member 32b or when there is a winning detection for 10 game balls. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a rail unit 50 for guiding the game ball launched from the game ball launching device 38 (see FIG. 7) to the upper part of the game board 30 is attached to the game board 30. A game ball launched in accordance with the turning operation of the game ball launch handle 18 is guided to a predetermined game area 30a through a ball guide passage 49 (to be described later) of the rail unit 50. The rail unit 50 is formed of a ring-shaped resin molded product (for example, a molded product added with fluororesin), and has an inner rail 51 and an outer rail 52 that are integrally formed in an inner and outer double. . The inner rail 51 is formed in a substantially annular shape except for about 1/4 of the upper part, and the outer rail 52 is formed so that a part (mainly the left side) faces the inner rail 51. In such a case, a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52, and a ball guide passage 49 is formed by a portion (the left portion toward the left) where the rails 51 and 52 are parallel to each other at a predetermined interval. . The ball guide passage 49 is formed in a groove shape having a contact surface with the game board 30, that is, a groove shape in which the front side is opened.

  A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 51 (the upper left portion in FIG. 2). This prevents a situation in which the game ball once guided from the ball guide passage 49 between the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 to the upper portion of the game board 30 returns to the ball guide passage 49 again. It has become. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to the outer rail 52 at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the game ball (upper right portion in FIG. 2: a portion corresponding to the tip portion of the outer rail 52). Therefore, the game ball fired at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 54 and is bounced back. On the inner surface of the outer rail 52, there is a sliding plate 55 as a long metal strip made of stainless steel to make the flight of the game ball smoother, that is, to reduce the frictional resistance of the game ball. It is attached.

  Further, an arc-shaped flange 56 is formed on the outer peripheral portion of the rail unit 50 so as to project outward from the periphery when viewed from the front. The flange 56 constitutes a mounting surface for the game board 30. When the rail unit 50 is attached to the game board 30, the flange 56 is brought into contact with the game board 30, and in this state, screws or the like are inserted into a plurality of through holes formed in the flange 56. The rail unit 50 is fastened to 30.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the top, bottom, left, and right ends of the rail unit 50 are formed in a substantially straight line (flat) when viewed from the front. That is, the flange 56 is cut off at each of the upper, lower, left and right ends of the rail unit 50 so that the rail diameter can be expanded in a limited area in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the game area 30a on the game board 30 can be expanded. It has become.

  A convex portion 57 is formed at the entrance of the ball guide passage 49 between the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 so as to close a part of the ball guide passage 49. The convex portion 57 is provided in a substantially vertical direction from the inner rail 51 to the lower end portion of the rail unit 50, and a foul ball that does not reach the game area 30 a and flows backward in the ball guide passage 49 is provided on the inner frame 12. It plays a role of guiding to a ball passage (not shown). Note that the lower right corner and the lower left corner of the game board 30 are spaces for attaching stickers (eg, S1 and S2 in FIG. 2) and plates such as certificate stamps (for example, serial numbers are described). In order to secure this adhering space, notches 58 and 59 are formed in the flange 56. By sticking a sticker such as a certificate (S1, S2 in FIG. 2) to the lower right corner or the lower left corner of the game board 30, the game board 30 and the certificate can be uniquely defined.

  Next, the game area 30a of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the game area 30 a is partitioned into a substantially circular shape by the inner peripheral portion (inner and outer rails) of the rail unit 50. In particular, in the present embodiment, the game area 30 a is partitioned on the board surface of the game board 30. The game area 30a is configured to be much larger than before. In the present embodiment, the distance between the uppermost point of the outer rail 52 and the lower part of the game board 30 is 445 mm (58 mm longer than the conventional product), and is from the extreme left position of the outer rail 52 to the extreme right position of the inner rail 51. The distance is 435 mm (50 mm longer than the conventional product). The distance from the extreme left position of the inner rail 51 to the extreme right position of the inner rail 51 is 418 mm.

  In the present embodiment, the game area 30a is viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the area of the guide rail that is a parallel part of the inner and outer rails 51 and 52 is excluded from the area surrounded by the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52. As an area. Therefore, the guide rail portion is not included in the game area 30a. The left limit position toward the game area 30 a is specified by the inner rail 51. The right limit position toward the game area 30 a is specified by the outer rail 52 and the components of the inner frame 12 arranged along the outer rail 52. Further, the lower limit position of the game area 30 a is specified by the lower end position of the game board 30. The upper limit position of the game area 30 a is specified by the outer rail 52.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the width (maximum width in the left-right direction) of the game area 30a is 418 mm, and the height (maximum width in the vertical direction) of the game area 30a is 445 mm.

  Although detailed disclosure of the drawings is omitted, game balls are supplied to the game ball launcher 38 one by one from the ball outlet on the front frame set 14 side (the ball outlet leading from the most downstream portion of the upper plate 19). .

  In the game area 30a, a third symbol display device 42 is disposed at a position slightly above the center, and a plurality of nails are disposed on the left side of the third symbol display device 42. Is formed. In addition, the game area 30a is narrower than the width of the left narrow area 30a1 from the upper side to the vicinity of the center of the right side of the third symbol display device 42, and has a width that allows one game ball to finally pass. An upper right narrow region 30a2 is formed. From the right side of the third symbol display device 42 to the lower side of the upper right narrow region 30a2 from the vicinity of the center to the lower side of the right upper narrow region 30a2. The lower right game area 30a3 having a plurality of game ball flow paths is also formed. The lower right game area 30a3 is provided with a second start port 34, a first start port 33b, and a variable winning device 32, and a holding device that can hold a plurality of game balls on the left side of the variable winning device 32. A device 400 is provided, and a general winning opening 31b is provided on the lower left side of the holding device 400.

  In the normal game state, an operation (left-handed game) is performed in which a game ball is launched from the left narrow region 30a1 toward the first start port 33a. During the big hit state (during the big hit round game), an operation (right-handed game) is performed to aim at the variable winning device 32 from the right narrow area 30a2. In the case of a promising big hit or a short time big hit, a right-handed game is performed during the big hit state, and a right-handed game aiming at the first start port 33b is also performed during the probable state after the big hit state or during the short time state.

  When a right-hand shot is performed to launch a game ball aiming at the upper right narrow region 30a2, the game ball that has exited the upper right narrow region 30a2 passes through the second start port 34. When the result of the lottery (second symbol lottery) based on the detection of the passage of the second start port 34 is a win, the opening / closing member 33c (see FIG. 4) of the first start port 33b is opened and a predetermined time later. Closed. The opening / closing member 33c is formed in a horizontally long substantially S shape, and is inclined downward toward the left side. The game ball may enter the opened first start port 33b, or may roll on the open / close member 33c being closed and flow further downstream. The game ball that has entered the first start port 33b is detected by the ball detection switch 31d. Entry detection by the entry detection switch 31d is a starting condition for starting the symbol variation display. However, in the normal gaming state, the probability that the result of the second symbol lottery will be set is set to be very low as compared with the probability variation state. Therefore, even if a right hand is made in the normal gaming state, it is difficult to expect winning of the second symbol lottery and opening of the opening / closing member 33c of the first start port 33b. Is called.

  On the downstream side of the opening / closing member 33c, three nails are arranged in a V shape, and the flow path of the game ball that rolls down on the opening / closing member 33c flows between the variable winning device 32 side and the holding device 400 side. Branch left and right. The game balls that have been shunted to the right may enter the open big prize opening 32a if they are in a big hit state, or pass in front of the closed big prize opening 32a from the lower right game area 30a3. In some cases, the gas is discharged and guided to the out port 36. The game balls that have been shunted to the left are held by the holding device 400 up to five balls. When the holding ball is released by the holding device 400, the game ball is discharged toward the general winning award 31b. If the discharged game ball can be successfully put on a distribution movable valve 409, which will be described later, the game ball enters the general winning opening 31b. When winning in the general winning opening 31b is detected, 15 game balls are paid out as winning balls. In the big hit state, the holding device 400 can hold a part of the game balls that are launched toward the big winning opening 32a. For example, the flow path is formed so that one out of 15 game balls passing through three nails is diverted to the holding device 400 side.

  In order to enter the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 into the general winning opening 31b, it is necessary to press a second frame button 21 described later. However, as will be described later, the distribution movable valve 409 operates in a manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Therefore, even if the player presses the second frame button 21 while viewing the distribution movable valve 409, the holding device 400 It is difficult to enter the game balls discharged from the general winning opening 31b. Further, the general winning opening 31b is arranged at a position in the lower right game area 30a3 that is difficult to enter unless it is a game ball discharged from the holding device 400. On the other hand, the general winning opening 31a is arranged in the left narrow region 30a1 at a position where it is easier to enter the ball than the general winning opening 31b. Thus, in the normal gaming state, it is difficult to expect to enter the general winning opening 31b or the first starting opening 33b even if the player makes a right turn. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the general winning opening 31a or the first starting opening 33a is not expected. Left-handed, where you can expect to enter.

  Next, the configuration of the holding device 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 shows a state where the decorative board 413 is removed from the holding device 400 in FIG. 4 as a cross section obtained by cutting the game board 30 in parallel with the game area.

  The holding device 400 is configured to change between a holding state in which the game ball flowing down the lower right game area 30a3 can be held and a released state in which the holding of the game ball is released. The hold device 400 is configured to change from the hold state to the release state when the player presses the second frame button 21.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the holding device 400 uses a horizontally long main body component 401 whose upper side is inclined downward in the left diagonal direction, and a plurality of games using the upper surface of the main body component 401. A holding unit driven by a holding unit 403 for holding the ball, a holding position for stopping the game ball stored in the holding unit 403, and a discharge position for allowing the game ball held in the holding unit 403 to be discharged downstream. A state switching unit 405.

  The holding unit 403 can hold a maximum of five game balls in an area surrounded by the upper surface of the main body part 401 and a pile-like game part and a nail arranged on the upper right side of the main part 401 (a figure to be described later). 44). The holding unit 403 does not accept further holding of game balls after holding 5 game balls. In this case, the additional game ball collides with the game ball reserved for the fifth ball, or the like, or goes to the grand prize opening 32a or passes the side of the big prize opening 32a to the out mouth 36 (see FIG. 2). )

  The holding state switching unit 405 includes a rotation shaft at a position slightly apart from the upper left end of the holding unit 403, and includes a discharge prevention valve 406 driven around the rotation shaft to a holding position and a discharge position. ing. The holding position is a position where the discharge prevention valve 406 takes a standing posture so as to block the game ball held in the holding unit 403. The discharge position is a position where the discharge prevention valve 406 is tilted so as to discharge the game ball held in the holding unit 403.

  Switching between the holding position and the discharge position of the discharge prevention valve 406 is performed when the player presses the second frame button 21. When the player presses the second frame button 21, the discharge prevention valve 406 is driven to tilt from the holding position to the discharging position, and one game ball held in the holding unit 403 is discharged. The discharge prevention valve 406 returns from the discharge position to the holding position at the timing when one game ball is discharged. Thereby, each time the player presses the second frame button 21, the game balls stored in the holding unit 403 can be discharged one by one.

In the configuration example for driving the discharge prevention valve 406, a solenoid and a power transmission mechanism are arranged on the back surface of the game board 30, and when the pressing of the second frame button 21 is detected, the solenoid protrudes or sucks, and the protrusion or suction Accordingly, the power transmission mechanism drives the discharge prevention valve 406 from the holding position to the discharge position. In this configuration, when one game ball is discharged, the solenoid performs the reverse operation, and the power transmission mechanism drives the discharge prevention valve 406 from the discharge position to the holding position in accordance with the operation.

  On the downstream side of the hold state switching unit 405, a retreat position where it is difficult to win the game ball released from the hold in the general winning opening 31b, and a game ball released from the hold are made easier to enter the general pay opening 31b. A sorting movable valve 409 that performs a sorting operation that changes to the protruding position is provided. Specifically, the sorting movable valve 409 is immersed in a recess recessed inward on the left side surface of the main body component 401 in the retracted position, and is driven so as to be exposed to the outside from the recess in the protruding position. Is done. The distribution movable valve 409 is switched between a protruding position and a retracted position by a solenoid and a power transmission mechanism arranged on the back surface of the game board 30. The solenoid and power transmission mechanism for driving the sorting movable valve 409 are the same as the configuration for driving the sorting state switching piece 405 described above.

  When the game ball discharged from the holding unit 403 is placed on the distribution movable valve 409 in a state of being in the protruding position, the game ball is guided from the distribution movable valve 409 to the general winning port 31b, and the general winning port 31b. Win a prize.

  The sorting operation of the sorting movable valve 409 is performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. A mode in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is realized by a plurality of modes. Specifically, the first mode in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is a mode in which the sorting movable valve 409 operates at high speed. The distribution movable valve 409 changes from the retracted position to the protruding position in about 0.9 seconds, for example, and returns to the retracted position. Such an operation is sufficiently faster than the opening / closing speed of the door member 32b that opens / closes the special winning opening 32a, and is therefore difficult for the player to visually recognize. Therefore, normally, it is difficult to place the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 while the sorting movable valve 409 is in the protruding position on the sorting movable valve 409 and to win the general winning opening 31b.

  The operation of the sorting movable valve 409 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In FIG. 5, the position of the tip in the state where the sorting movable valve 409 is located at the retracted position is called P1, and the sorting movable valve 409 is about half of the total length (a length slightly longer than half of the maximum protruding amount). The position of the tip in the protruding state is called P2, and the position of the tip in the state where the sorting movable valve 409 is located at the protruding position is called P3. The distribution movable valve 409 attracts the movable iron core by flowing a current through the solenoid, and changes from P1 to P3 via P2 in accordance with the movement of the movable iron core. In the distribution movable valve 409, the movable iron core is pulled back by a restoring force such as a spring by cutting off the current to the solenoid, and changes from P3 to P1 via P2 in accordance with the movement of the movable iron core. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the distribution movable valve 409 is shifted from P1 to P2 over 0.2 seconds from the start of the movable timing 0.0 seconds to the second 0.2 seconds after the start of the movable timing. The period is called the first period). The game ball that falls to the height of the sorting movable valve 409 in the first period falls without hitting the sorting movable valve 409 or is struck from the side (leftward) by the tip of the sorting movable valve 409. It is difficult to win the general winning opening 31b without being guided to the general winning opening 31b.

  The period is changed from P2 to P3 over 0.1 seconds from 0.2 seconds after the start of the movable timing to 0.3 seconds after the start of the movable timing (this period is referred to as a second A period). P3 is changed to P2 over 0.1 seconds from the start of the movable timing 0.6 seconds to the start of the movable timing 0.7 seconds (this period is referred to as the second B period). The game balls that fall to the height of the distribution movable valve 409 in the second A period and the second B period are easy to get on the distribution movable valve 409, are guided to the general winning opening 31b, and easily win the general winning opening 31b.

  The distribution movable valve 409 stops at the position P3 for 0.3 seconds from 0.3 seconds after the start of the movable timing to 0.6 seconds after the start of the movable timing (this period is referred to as a third period). The game ball that falls to the height of the distribution movable valve 409 in the third period has the largest amount of protrusion of the distribution movable valve 409, so it is reliably guided to the general winning opening 31b and wins the most in the general winning opening 31b. easy.

  The period is changed from P2 to P1 over 0.2 seconds from the start of the movable timing 0.7 seconds to the start of the movable timing 0.9 seconds (this period is referred to as a fourth period). Since the game ball that falls to the height of the sorting movable valve 409 in the fourth period is only slightly applied to the tip of the sorting movable valve 409, the gaming ball may fall on the side of the main body part 401 as it is. Many. Therefore, in the fourth period, it is difficult to win the general winning opening 31b without being guided to the general winning opening 31b.

  As described above, the distribution movable valve 409 has a short time for maintaining the protruding position, and the change from the retracted position to the protruded position (protrusion operation) also changes (returns) from the protruded position to the retracted position. Operation) is also fast. Therefore, even if the player can see the operation of the distribution movable valve 409, it is difficult for the player to win the game ball held in the holding device 400 in the general winning opening 31b.

  For the sorting operation of the sorting movable valve 409, a mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize is adopted in addition to the speed of the operation. For example, as shown in FIG. 3, the holding device 400 is disposed on the front side of the main body component 401, and is disposed on the front side of the colored and permeable resinous decorative plate 413 and the decorative plate 413. And a resinous movable decorative piece 415 having transparency. The decorative plate 413 is formed in a size that covers the sorting movable valve 409. The movable decorative piece 415 swings up and down in small increments behind the discharge prevention valve 406 and the sorting movable valve 409.

  If the distribution movable valve 409 and the movable decorative piece 415 start to move at the same moment, even if the distribution movable valve 409 operates in a manner that is difficult for the player to see, the operation of the movable decorative piece 415 is performed. The operation timing of the sorting movable valve 409 may be predicted from the timing. However, in this embodiment, the movable decorative piece 415 starts to move with a different trigger from the operation of the sorting movable valve 409. For example, the distribution movable valve 409 operates with the start of power-on of the gaming machine, but the movable decorative piece 415 operates upon detection of entering the first start port 33a. Since the sorting movable valve 409 and the movable decorative piece 415 operate without being synchronized, it is difficult for the player to predict the operation timing of the sorting movable valve 409 from the operation timing of the movable decorative piece 415. This makes it difficult to visually recognize whether the sorting movable valve 409 is in the retracted position or the protruding position, so that it is difficult to match the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 is in the protruding position with the timing at which the game ball is released.

  In addition, the holding device 400 includes a holding area light emitting unit 417 that emits light toward the front side at a location adjacent to the discharge prevention valve 406 and the sorting movable valve 409. The light emitted from the reserved area light emitting unit 417 is diffused by the decorative plate 413 and the movable decorative piece 415, and the diffused light makes it difficult to visually recognize the operation of the sorting movable valve 409. This makes it difficult to visually recognize whether the sorting movable valve 409 is in the retracted position or the protruding position, so it is difficult to match the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 is in the protruding position with the timing at which the game ball is released from holding. .

  In this way, if a game ball is launched toward the big prize opening 32a during the big hit game, it is possible to hold the game ball in the holding device 400 at the same time. The game ball held in the holding device 400 can be discharged from the holding device 400 at an arbitrary timing when the player operates the second frame button 21 to aim for winning in the general winning opening 31b. . However, since the distribution movable valve 409 operates at a constant cycle from the time when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as described later, and operates at a high speed as described above, it is difficult to be visually recognized by the player. Then, it is difficult to win the game ball held in the holding device 400 to the general winning opening 31b. In order to win the game ball held in the holding device 400 to the general winning opening 31b, the player participates in the movable pattern suggestion effect that suggests the movable pattern of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409, as will be described later. There is a need.

  Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that various control boards are arranged vertically or horizontally on the back surface (actually, the back surface of the inner frame 12 and the game board 30) or stacked in front and back. Further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism portion 352) for supplying game balls, a protective cover made of resin, and the like are attached. In this embodiment, various control boards are divided into two mounting bases to form two control board units, and these control board units are individually attached to the inner frame 12 or the back of the game board 30. ing. In this case, a main control device 261 and a sub control device 262 shown in FIG. 8 to be described later are mounted on one mounting base to form a unit, and a payout control device 311 and a launch control device 312 shown in FIG. 8 to be described later. The power supply device 313 is mounted on the other mounting base to form a unit. Here, for convenience, the former unit is referred to as “first control board unit 201”, and the latter unit is referred to as “second control board unit 202”.

  Further, since the dispensing mechanism 352 and the protective cover are also integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally referred to as a back pack, the unit is referred to as a “back pack unit 203” here. The detailed configuration of each unit 201 to 203 will be described later.

  The first control board unit 201, the second control board unit 202, and the back pack unit 203 are configured so that they can be attached and detached without using any tools or the like in units of units. It is provided and can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 or the back surface of the game board 30. This is also a device for making it possible to easily check a hidden configuration or the like even if the units 201 to 203 and other configurations are arranged one behind the other.

  In addition, on the back surface of the game board 30, a winning detection mechanism for detecting the passage of game balls such as various winning holes is provided. Specifically, a prize opening switch is provided at a position corresponding to the general prize opening 31 on the front side of the game board 30, and the variable prize winning device 32 is provided with a count switch. The count switch is a switch for counting winning balls. In addition, operation port switches are provided at positions corresponding to the first start ports 33a and 33b, respectively, and the entry of game balls into the first start ports 33a and 33b is detected by the operation port switches. A gate switch is provided at a position corresponding to the second starting port 34, and the passage of the game ball to the second starting port 34 is detected by the operating port switch.

  The prize opening switch and the gate switch are connected to a board connection board (not shown) through electrical wiring (not shown), and this board connection board is further connected to a main control board 261a (see FIG. 8) in the main controller 261 described later. ing. Further, the count switch is connected to a large winning opening relay terminal board (not shown), and this large winning opening relay terminal board (not shown) is also connected to the main control board 261a. On the other hand, the operation port switch is directly connected to the main control board 261a without going through the relay board.

  The variable prize winning device 32 is provided with a special prize opening solenoid 432, which will be described later, for opening the special prize opening 32a. In addition, the first start port 33b is provided with an operation port solenoid for opening the electric accessory.

  The detection results detected by the winning detection mechanism are taken into a main control board 261a in a main control device 261, which will be described later, and the main control board 261a issues a payout command (a game ball of each game ball) according to the winning situation each time. The number of payouts) is transmitted to the payout control board 311a. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by the output of the payout control board 311a. In such a case, a conventional method (so-called evidence ball method) in which game balls won in various winning openings are once collected in a winning ball processing device and paid out after the winning ball processing device confirms the presence of winning balls one by one in order. Unlike the above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the winning of a game ball is electrically detected for each winning opening and the payout is immediately made (that is, the winning ball processing apparatus is abolished in the pachinko machine 10). doing). Therefore, even if there are a lot of game balls to be paid out, the payout can be carried out quickly. However, the conventional “evidence ball system” may be applied to the present invention.

  The first control board unit 201 has a substantially L-shaped mounting base (not shown), and the main control device 261 and the sub control device 262 are mounted on the mounting base. Here, the main control device 261 includes a main control board 261a described later, and the main control board 261a is configured to be accommodated in a board box 263 (encapsulating means) made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (sealing means) so that they cannot be opened, and the substrate box 263 is thus sealed.

  Any configuration can be applied to the sealing unit as the sealing means as long as it connects the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened. In this embodiment, for example, five sealing members are connected. The box base and the box cover are connected so that they cannot be opened by inserting a locking claw into the long hole of the sealing member. Sealing processing by the sealing unit prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation quickly and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. Even after that, it is possible to perform the opening / sealing process again. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking claw into the long hole of at least one sealing member among the five sealing members constituting the sealing unit (not shown). And when opening the board | substrate box 263 by the malfunction of the accommodated main control board | substrate 261a etc., the connection of the sealing member in which the latching claw was inserted, and another sealing member is cut | disconnected. Thereafter, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claws are inserted into the long holes of the other sealing members. If the history of opening the substrate box 263 is left in the substrate box 263, it can be easily found that the unauthorized opening has been performed by looking at the substrate box 263.

  The sub-control device 262 includes a sub-control board 262a described later, and the sub-control board 262a is configured to be accommodated in a board box (not shown) made of a transparent resin material or the like. A power supply relay board (not shown) is mounted on the sub-control device 262, and power supplied from a power supply board described later is supplied to the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 via the power supply relay board (not shown). Is output.

  The second control board unit 202 has a horizontally long mounting base (not shown) on which a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313 and a card unit connection board (not shown) are mounted. ing. The payout control device 311 includes a control board including a central control CPU, a ROM, a RAM, various ports, and the like. The launch control device 312 includes a launch control board. The power supply device 313 includes a power supply. A control board is provided. The payout control board 311a of the payout control device 311 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls. In addition, the launch control board of the launch control apparatus 312 controls the launch apparatus 229 (see FIG. 8) in accordance with the operation of the game ball launch handle 18 by the player. The required power supply voltage required is generated and output. The launching device 229 is of various types such as a mechanical launching part that strikes and launches a game ball with a launcher that operates according to the driving of a launching motor, and an electromagnetic launching part that launches a game ball by generating an electromagnetic field. Can be adopted. The card unit connection board (not shown) is electrically connected to the ball lending operation unit 120 (see FIG. 1) on the front surface of the pachinko machine and a card unit (not shown), and takes in and issues a ball lending operation command by the player. This is output to the control device 311. Note that the card unit connection board 314 is unnecessary in a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit.

  The payout control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313 and the card unit connection board (not shown) are respectively housed and configured in a substrate box (not shown) made of a transparent resin material or the like. In particular, in the dispensing control device 311, similarly to the main control device 261 described above, the box base and the box cover constituting the substrate box (encapsulating means) are connected to each other by the sealing unit (sealing means) so that they cannot be opened. The box is sealed.

  The payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch (not shown). For example, when a state return switch (not shown) is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor unit, the payout motor 358a (see FIG. 8) slowly rotates forward to eliminate the ball jam (normal state). (Return to).

  Further, a RAM erase switch 323 is provided on the power supply monitoring board 261b. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that even if a power failure occurs, it maintains the state at the time of a power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of a power failure when returning from a power failure (power recovery) It has become. Therefore, if the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, when the hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. If you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, turn on the power while holding down the RAM erase switch 323. We are going to throw it in.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the back pack unit 203 is a unit in which a back pack 351 formed of resin and a payout mechanism portion 352 for a game ball are integrated.

  The back pack unit 203 is provided with a tank 355 that opens upward at the top, and the tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment (game island equipment) of the game hall. Below the tank 355 is connected, for example, a tank rail 356 that has two rows of spherical passages in the horizontal direction and gently descends and inclines toward the downstream side. Are connected. A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are paid out appropriately according to a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor 358a. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 through a payout passage (not shown).

  The tank rail 356 is provided with a vibrator 360 for applying vibration to the tank rail 356. For example, the vibrator 360 is fastened and attached to the tank rail 356 with, for example, two screws. Further, the vibrator 360 is not in surface contact with the tank rail 356 but is in contact with the two screw portions, so that the vibration by the vibrator 360 is more effectively transmitted to the tank rail 356. ing. Therefore, if a clogged ball occurs near the tank rail 356, the clogged ball is eliminated by driving the vibrator 360.

  The payout mechanism 352 is provided with a payout relay board (not shown) for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power from outside. is set up. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, an AC 24V main power supply via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

  Each of the dispensing mechanisms 352 from the tank 355 to the dispensing passage (not shown) is formed of a conductive resin material (for example, conductive polycarbonate resin) and grounded at a part thereof. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the noise by charging of a game ball is suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 7, an inner frame open detection switch 388 that detects that the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 is provided on the upper right side of the inner frame 12. When the inner frame 12 is opened, it is outputted from the inner frame open detection switch 388 to the computer for the hall (in the pachinko parlor).

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 261, a payout control device 311, a launch control device 312, a sub control device 262, a display control device 45, a power supply device 313, and the like. In the following, these devices will be described in detail individually.

  The main control device 261 of the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device that performs main control. The CPU 501 has various data such as a game program such as a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM 502 such as necessary data according to the progress of the game. RAM 503 which is a memory for temporarily storing data, an input / output port 505 for communicating with various devices, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission / reception circuit, and various lotteries A random number generator (not shown), a clock pulse generating circuit (not shown), etc. used for time counting and synchronization. Note that these electronic components and electronic circuits are provided on the main control board 261a.

  The RAM 503 has a configuration in which data can be retained (backed up) by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The RAM 503 temporarily stores various data and the like. It has a memory and area.

  That is, when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 executes the normal processing of FIG. 12 described later until the end, that is, until the RAM access prohibition in step S216 ends. Therefore, the RAM 503 only needs to store and hold the contents of the counter buffer and the holding ball storage area when the power is turned off (including when a power failure occurs), and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on when the power is turned on again. The state before cutting can be restored. Specifically, the RAM 503 has a dedicated backup area for storing values of registers, I / O, and the like for game information during normal processing when the power is turned off (including when a power failure occurs). There is no need to provide it. The N501 terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power failure signal S1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when a power failure occurs due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Due to the occurrence, the power failure process (NMI interrupt process) of FIG. 17 is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 incorporating the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a sub control device 262, a first symbol display device 40, and a second symbol display device 41, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 505.

  In addition, the sub control device 262, for example, in accordance with an instruction from the main control board 261a in the main control device 261, a CPU 551 that controls voice and lamp display in a variable display effect and a jackpot game effect and controls the display control device 45, and a CPU 551. ROM 552 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the RAM, RAM 553 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in ROM 552, and bus line 554 And an input / output port 555 and the like. These electronic components are provided with a sub-control board 262a.

  The payout control device 311 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by a payout motor 358a. The CPU 511 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 is configured to hold (backup) data by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 described above. The RAM 513 includes a memory and an area for temporarily storing various data. The payout control device 311 is programmed to pay out five game balls for winning the general winning opening 31a and paying out 15 game balls for winning the general winning opening 41b.

  The RAM 513 stores and holds information related to the state when the power is turned off in order to return the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. In other words, the storage of the RAM 513 is executed when the power is turned off by the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 17) and the steps S1015 and S1016 (see FIG. 19) in the latter half of the payout control process. Is executed in the power recovery process when the power is turned on.

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 incorporating the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 through a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 261, launch controller 312 and payout motor 358a are connected to input / output port 515, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 229, and the launch device 229 is permitted to drive when a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, the launch control device 312 receives a card unit connection signal S4 from the payout control device 311 (a signal that is output when the card unit described above is connected to the pachinko machine 10), and the player Touch detection signal S5 output when the game ball launch handle 18 is touched and output when the launch stop switch 18a provided on the game ball launch handle 18 for stopping the launch is not operated. The firing permission signal S7 is output to the main controller 261 on condition that all of the fired maintenance signals S6 to be performed are inputted.

  That is, the period during which the firing permission signal S7 is ON (high level) is a firing permission state, and the period during which the firing permission signal S7 is OFF (low level) is a firing non-permission state. That is, the main control device 261 controls the firing control signal S8 (pulse signal) for controlling the launching solenoid that launches the game ball and the firing rail during the period in which the firing permission signal S7 that is input is ON (high level). A ball feed control signal S9 (pulse signal) for controlling a ball feed solenoid for sending a game ball is repeatedly output to the firing control device 312 at a predetermined repetition cycle. The launch control device 312 drives and controls the launch device 229 based on the launch control signal S8 and the ball feed control signal S9, and a game ball is launched with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the game ball launch handle 18. On the contrary, the main control device 261 does not output the firing control signal S8 and the ball feed control signal S9 to the firing control device 312 during the period when the input firing permission signal S7 is OFF (low level). The game ball is not fired by 229.

  The display control device 45 controls the variable display of the third symbol (decorative symbol) on the third symbol display device 42. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a ROM (program ROM) 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, an image controller 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. And. The input of the input port 527 is connected to the output of the sub-control device 262, and the CPU 521, ROM 522, work RAM 523, and image controller 526 are connected to the input port 527. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the image controller 526 via a bus line 531, and a third symbol display device 42 which is a liquid crystal display device is connected to an output of the output port 529.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the decorative symbol display on the third symbol display device 42 based on the various commands transmitted by editing the various commands from the main control device 261 by the sub-control device 262. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data, and the work RAM 523 temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is a memory for.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and the display contents of the third symbol display device 42 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as decorative symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The image controller 526 adjusts the timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, and the output port 529 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads display data stored in the video RAM 524 from the character ROM 525 at a predetermined timing. It is displayed on the symbol display device 42.

  In addition, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10. The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24 volt power supply supplied from the outside, and supplies a + 12V power supply for driving various switches, motors, etc., a + 5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. The + 12V power source, the + 5V power source, and the backup power source are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. Note that operation power (+12 V power, +5 V power, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the main control device 261 includes a main control board 261a and a power supply monitoring board 261b separate from the main control board 261a in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. . The power monitoring board 261b includes a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal S1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the voltage of AC 24 volts with the power supply unit 541 and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when the time when this voltage has become less than 24 volts exceeds, for example, 20 milliseconds. The power failure signal S1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal S1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing in FIG. 17).

  In addition, even after the time when the AC 5 volts monitored by the power supply unit 541 becomes less than 5 volts exceeds 20 milliseconds, the power supply unit 541 has a sufficient time to execute the power failure process. The control system is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit for taking in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clearing backup data in the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 in accordance with the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erase signal S2 to the main control board 261a. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the RAM 503 is cleared in the main controller 261, and the payout controller 311 is in the main controller. When the initialization command from H.261 is received, the data in RAM 513 is cleared.

  By the way, in the third symbol display device 42 (liquid crystal display device), as shown in FIG. 9, three left, middle, and right decorative symbol rows L, M, and R are set. For each of M and R, three decorative symbols, an upper decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a lower decorative symbol, are variably displayed. In the present embodiment, the third symbol includes a main decorative symbol SZ with numbers “0” to “9”, and a sub-decorative symbol FZ of a plurality of types (for example, ●, ▲, ■, etc.). The main decorative symbols SZ are displayed in ascending or descending numerical order, and the sub decorative symbols FZ are arranged between the main decorative symbols SZ to form a series of decorative symbol sequences L, M, and R. ing. Then, the main decorative design SZ and the sub-decorative design FZ are displayed variably from top to bottom, for example, with periodicity.

  In this case, in the left decorative design row L, the above-mentioned series of decorative designs are displayed in descending order (that is, in the order of decreasing the number of the main decorative design SZ), and in the middle decorative design row M and the right decorative design row R, the same The series of decorative symbols is displayed in ascending order (that is, in order of increasing the number of the main decorative symbols SZ). Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the left decorative symbol row L → the right decorative symbol row R → the middle decorative symbol row M, and at the time of the stop, five effective lines on the third symbol display device 42, that is, the upper line L1 and the middle line L2 The main decorative design SZ or the secondary decorative design FZ can be arranged in a predetermined combination in any of the lower line L3, the right rising line L4, and the left rising line L5.

  Specifically, the 3rd symbol display device 42 is based on the game ball entering the first start ports 33a and 33b and the determination result by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. A predetermined identification information fluctuation display effect (fluctuation display effect of the third symbol) for informing the success / failure of the big hit state or the probable big hit state is performed. For example, by displaying the main decorative symbol SZ (third symbol) in an even number of symbols on the display screen of the third symbol display device 42, for example, the player is shown winning the normal big hit state. In addition, the main decorative symbol SZ (third symbol) is arranged on the display screen of the third symbol display device 42 in, for example, an odd symbol (the main decorative symbol SZ of “1” is aligned on the line L5 shown in FIG. 9A). ), The player is shown winning of the probable jackpot state. In addition, the state where the sub-decoration symbols FZ are aligned on the display screen of the third symbol display device 42 (the state where the sub-decoration symbols FZ of “●” are aligned on the line L2 shown in FIG. 9B) is confirmed. In this case, the player is shown the winning of the hourly and junior bonus. And the 3rd symbol display apparatus 42 will display a special game animation as a jackpot if the main decoration symbol SZ and the sub-decoration symbol FZ are arranged with the combination of the jackpot symbol.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 uses the random number relating to the actuating action and other random numbers used for the game to draw the first symbol display device 40 (lottery lottery: first Symbol jackpot lottery), symbol display settings, lottery drawing of the second symbol display device 41 (second symbol hitting lottery), symbol display settings, and decorative symbols (third symbol) of the third symbol display device 42 A lottery and setting related to variable display will be performed.

  Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the jackpot of the first symbol display device 40 based on the ball entering the first starting port 33a is used as a random number related to the operation of the accessory. A first jackpot random number counter C1a used for lottery, a first jackpot symbol counter C2a used for selection of a jackpot symbol of the first symbol display device 40 based on a ball entering the first start port 33a, and a first jackpot random number A first initial value random number counter CINI1a used for setting the initial value of the counter C1a, a second big hit random number counter C1b used for the big win lottery of the first symbol display device 40 based on the ball entering the first start port 33b, The second jackpot symbol counter C2b used for selection of the jackpot symbol of the first symbol display device 40 based on the ball entering the first start port 33b, and the second jackpot random number counter The second initial value random number counter CINI1b used for setting the initial value of 1b and the big winning port 32a of the variable winning device 32 when the first big hit random number counter C1a is a big hit by winning the first starting port 33a. Round number determination counter CR for determining the number of rounds to be released (either 15 rounds or 2 rounds in the embodiment), and a second symbol random number counter C4 used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 41, The initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4 is used.

  Further, in this pachinko machine 10, as other random numbers used for the game, as shown in FIG. 10, when the variation pattern of the decoration symbol of the third symbol display device 42 is selected, the type of the variation pattern is roughly specified. First and second stop pattern selection counters C3a and C3b used for selection of stop patterns, variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 used for selection of decorative pattern variation patterns of the third symbol display device 42, and second The second symbol out symbol counter C5 used for the symbol out symbol selection of the symbol display device 41 is used. Each counter described above is constituted by a program executed by the CPU 501.

  For example, “stop pattern 0” indicates a complete deviation variation pattern group including a plurality of types of complete deviation variation patterns, and “stop pattern 1” indicates a front / rear deviation variation pattern group including a plurality of types of front / rear deviation variation patterns. “Stop pattern 2” indicates a reach variation pattern group other than front / rear out of reach variation patterns consisting of a plurality of types of reach variation patterns other than front / rear out, and “Stop pattern 3” indicates a plurality of types of normal jackpot variation patterns. The “stop pattern 4” indicates the hourly and jackpot variation pattern group composed of a plurality of types of hourly and shorter hit variation patterns, and the “stop pattern 5” indicates the plurality of types of probable variation jackpot variations. The probability variation jackpot variation pattern group consisting of patterns is shown.

  All of these counters C1a to C3a, C1b to C3b, C4, C5, CINI1a, CIN1b, CINI2, and CS1 to CS3 are each incremented by “1” (hereinafter referred to as “update”). After reaching the maximum value, the loop counter returns to “0”. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 shown in FIG.

  In addition, the RAM 503 includes a first reserved ball storage area including one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas) related to entering the first starting port 33a, and a first start. There is provided a second reserved ball storage area composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas) related to entering the mouth 33b. For example, in each area of the first reserved ball storage area, the first big hit random number counter C1a, the first big hit symbol counter C2a, and the first stop pattern selection are selected in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the first start port 33a. Each value of the counter C3a and the round number determination counter CR is stored in time series. Further, in each area of the second reserved ball storage area, the second big hit random number counter C1b, the second big hit symbol counter C2b and the second stop pattern selection are selected in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the first start port 33b. Each value of the counter C3b is stored in time series.

  Each counter described above will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. The first jackpot random number counter C1a is configured so that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of “0” to “738”, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, “738”), returns to “0”. In particular, when the first jackpot random number counter C1a makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1a at that time is read as the initial value of the first jackpot random number counter C1a. The first initial value random number counter CINI1a is a loop counter similar to the first big hit random number counter C1a (value = 0 to 738), and is updated once every timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later. It is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing (see FIG. 12) described later. The first jackpot random number counter C1a is updated periodically (once every timer interruption (see FIG. 15) described later in this embodiment), and the RAM 503 is held at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33a. Stored in the ball storage area.

  Similarly, the second big hit random number counter C1b is also incremented one by one within a range of “0” to “738”, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (ie, “738”), returns to “0”. It has become. In particular, when the second jackpot random number counter C1b makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI1b at that time is read as the initial value of the second jackpot random number counter C1b. The second initial value random number counter CINI1b is a loop counter similar to the second big hit random number counter C1b (value = 0 to 738) and is updated once every timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later. It is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing (see FIG. 12) described later. The second big hit random number counter C1b is updated periodically (once every timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later in this embodiment), and the game balls of the RAM 503 are updated at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33b. 2 Stored in the reserved ball storage area.

  The hit value of the first jackpot random number counter C1a and the second jackpot random number counter C1b, that is, the number of random number values that are jackpots, is set to two types, low probability (normal time) and high probability. The number of random number values that are jackpots at probability is 2 and the value is “350,700”, the number of random number values that are jackpots at high probability is 14, and the value is “50, 101, 160, 209, 257, 310, 361, 418, 480, 517, 578, 635, 677, 730 ". Note that the high probability means, for example, a state where the jackpot is determined by a predetermined probability variation pattern and the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value, that is, a so-called “probability change”. Means the time when it is not in such a probable state. In the normal gaming state, the opening time of the first starting port 33b is, for example, 1.0 seconds, whereas in the probability changing state and the short time state, the opening time of the second starting port 33b is, for example, 3 Since it is 0 seconds, the first start port 33b is easier to enter the game ball than the first start port 33a in the probability changing state and the short time state.

  The first jackpot symbol counter C2a has a symbol when the first symbol display device 40 (consisting of two LEDs 40a and 40b) stops during the jackpot (after the variation display of the two LEDs 40a and 40b in this embodiment). The final light emission state) is determined. In this embodiment, the jackpot symbol counter C2 is incremented one by one within a range of “0” to “4”, for example, and reaches a maximum value (ie, “4”) and then returns to “0”. Yes. The first jackpot symbol counter C2a is updated periodically (once every timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later) in the same manner as in the case of the first jackpot random number counter C1a described above, and the game ball is first started. It is stored in the first reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing of winning the mouth 33a. For example, when the first jackpot random number counter C1a is a jackpot and the values of the first jackpot symbol counter C2a are “0” and “4”, both LEDs 40a and 40b of the first symbol display device 40 emit blue light. Stops in a state and usually shows a win for the jackpot. Further, when the first jackpot random number counter C1a is a jackpot and the values of the first jackpot symbol counter C2a are “1” and “3”, the LED 40a is stopped in a blue light emitting state and the LED 40b is in a red light emitting state. Stop and show the win to the time junior college. In addition, when the first jackpot random number counter C1a is a jackpot and the value of the first jackpot symbol counter C2a is “2”, both LEDs 40a and 40b are stopped in a red light emitting state, and the winning to the probable jackpot state is won. Indicates. In other words, the probability of probability of winning for the first start port 33a is 20%. When the first jackpot random number counter C1a is off, both the LEDs 40a and 40b are stopped in an unlit state regardless of the value of the first jackpot symbol counter C2a, indicating that they are off.

  The second big hit symbol counter C2b is a symbol when the first symbol display device 40 (consisting of two LEDs 40d and 40e) stops changing (after the change display of the two LEDs 40d and 40e in this embodiment). The final light emission state) is determined. In this embodiment, the second big hit symbol counter C2b is incremented one by one within a range of “0” to “4”, for example, and reaches the maximum value (that is, “4”) and then returns to “0”. It has become. The second jackpot symbol counter C2b is updated periodically (once every timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later) as in the case of the second jackpot random number counter C1b described above, and the game ball is first started. It is stored in the second reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing of winning the mouth 33b. For example, when the second jackpot random number counter C1b is a jackpot and the value of the second jackpot symbol counter C2b is “0”, both LEDs 40d and 40e of the first symbol display device 40 stop in a blue light emitting state. , Usually indicate a win to the jackpot. Further, when the second jackpot random number counter C1b is a jackpot and the value of the second jackpot symbol counter C2b is “4”, the LED 40a stops in a blue light emitting state and the LED 40b stops in a red light emitting state, and the time is shortened. Shows winning the jackpot. Further, when the second jackpot random number counter C1b is a jackpot and the value of the second jackpot symbol counter C2b is “1” to “3”, both LEDs 40a and 40b are stopped in a red light emitting state, and the probability variation jackpot Indicates a win for the state. In other words, the probability of probability of winning for the first start port 33b is 60%. When the second jackpot random number counter C1b is off, both the LEDs 40c and 40d are stopped in an unlit state regardless of the value of the second jackpot symbol counter C2b, indicating that they are off.

  Further, the first stop pattern selection counter C3a and the second stop pattern selection counter C3b are incremented one by one within a range of, for example, “0” to “238” and reach “0” after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). It is the composition which returns to. In the present embodiment, for the winning to the first start opening 33a, the first stop pattern selection counter C3a causes the reach of the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 after the reach of the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 is reached. “Left-and-front disengagement reach”, which stops by one shift before and after, and “Leach other than disengagement before and after disengagement” where the final stop decorative pattern stops after the reach occurs, other than before and after the reach-decoration pattern. "Lottery." As for the winning to the first start port 33b, the second stop pattern selection counter C3b draws “front / rear detachment reach”, “reach other than front / rear detachment reach” and “complete detachment” in the same manner as described above. Yes. For example, C3a and C3b = 0 to 201 correspond to complete disengagement, C3a and C3b = 202 to 208 correspond to front / rear outreach, and C3a, C3b = 209 to 238 correspond to reach other than front / rear out. In addition, the lottery (reach lottery) content of the stop pattern selection counter C3 indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability or a high probability, or the variable time reduction function of the first symbol display device 40 has not been activated. It may be set individually depending on whether the number is the number of the operation suspending balls at the start of the variation of the first symbol. The first stop pattern selection counter C3a is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later), and the first holding ball in the RAM 503 is timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33a. Stored in the storage area. Similarly, the second stop pattern selection counter C3b is also updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later), and the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33b. Are stored in the second reserved ball storage area.

  The round number determination counter CR is the number of rounds (15 in the embodiment) for opening the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 when the first big hit random number counter C1a is a big hit by winning the first start opening 33a. One of two rounds). In this embodiment, the round number determination counter CR is incremented one by one within a range of “0” to “4”, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, “4”), returns to “0”. ing. The round number determination counter CR is updated periodically (once every timer interrupt (see FIG. 15 described later)) as in the case of the first big hit random number counter C1a described above, and the game ball is changed to the first start port. It is stored in the first reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing of winning 33a. When the first big hit random number counter C1a is big hit and the value of the round number determination counter CR is “0”, the number of rounds for opening the big prize opening 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is, for example, 15 rounds. Per 15R is executed (hereinafter, 15R is indicated as appropriate). When the first big hit random number counter C1a is big hit and the value of the round number determination counter CR is “1” to “4”, the number of rounds to open the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32. For example, 2R rounds (hereinafter, 2R is appropriately indicated) are executed. That is, when a big hit is made by winning the first start port 33a (the first big hit random number counter C1a is a big win), the number of rounds is set such that 20% per 15R and 80% per 2R. The jackpot state you have is set.

  In the case where a big hit (the second big hit random number counter C1b is a big win) due to winning at the first start port 33b, for example, a per 15R is always executed (per 15R is 100%). In addition, a jackpot state is set in which the game value given to the player is greater than when the player wins the first start opening 33a.

  Of the three variation type counters CS1 to CS3, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one in the range of “0 to 198”, for example, and reaches “0” after reaching the maximum value (ie, “198”). For example, the variation type counter CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of “0 to 240”, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, “240”) and then returns to “0”. For example, the variation type counter CS3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of “0 to 162”, and reaches a maximum value (that is, “162”) and then returns to “0”. In the following description, the variation type counter CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, the variation type counter CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”, and the variation type counter CS3 is also referred to as “third variation type counter” as appropriate. .

  The first variation type counter CS1 determines a rough decoration pattern variation pattern group such as a reach type of a decorative symbol (third symbol) or a completely unacceptable type such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, or the like. . Here, for example, it is assumed that the first stop pattern selection counter C3a has a value indicating “stop pattern 1” (that is, a value indicating a back-and-forth out-of-line reach variation pattern group). It is assumed that the variation pattern of the normal reach group (consisting of a plurality of different normal reach types) is determined by the one variation type counter CS1.

  Subsequently, one more variation pattern is determined by the second variation type counter CS2 from the variation pattern group determined by the first variation type counter CS1 in this way. Here, for example, it is assumed that one type of normal reach from the normal reach group is determined by the second variation type counter CS2. Note that a plurality of different types of normal reach can be realized by giving different differences such as the elapsed time until the final stop decorative symbol (for example, the middle decorative symbol in this embodiment) stops after the occurrence of reach. Is mentioned.

  Subsequently, the third variation type counter CS3 determines which time the variation time is added in one variation pattern determined by the second variation type counter CS2. For example, as the addition time, when the decorative symbol (third symbol) of the middle decorative symbol row stops on the third symbol display device 42, the decorative symbol of the middle decorative symbol row slips after that. Additional time, which is the time until stop display is given. In this way, the decoration pattern variation mode can be determined more finely by the variation type counters CS1 to CS3. In other words, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 to CS3.

  Note that the symbol variation mode is determined only by the first variation type counter CS1, the symbol variation mode is determined only by the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2, or the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode in the same manner as described above, or to determine the symbol variation mode in the combination of the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 and the stop symbol.

  The variation type counters CS <b> 1 to CS <b> 3 are updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer values of the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are acquired when the variation pattern is determined when the variation of the first symbol is started by the first symbol display device 40. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10, since the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are acquired at the start of the variation of the first symbol by the first symbol display device 40, the first reserved ball storage area or the second reserved ball storage. It is not necessary to store the data in the area, and it is only necessary to sequentially update and store it in the counter buffer.

  In addition, the magnitude | size and range of each counter mentioned above are only examples, and can be changed arbitrarily. However, the first jackpot random number counter C1a, the second jackpot random number counter C1b, the first stop pattern selection counter C3a, the second stop pattern selection counter C3b, and the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are all different prime numbers. Also, it is desirable to set the values so as not to synchronize. The counter values of the first big hit random number counter C1a and the second big hit random number counter C1b may be different values.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol of the second symbol display device 41. The second symbol random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of “0” to “250” and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The second symbol random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later), and is acquired when the game ball passes through the left or right second starting port 34.

  There are two types of hit values of the second symbol random number counter C4, that is, the number of random numbers per symbol of the second symbol, low probability (normal time) and high probability. The number of random number values per second symbol at the low probability is 5, and the values are “50, 101, 150, 201, 250”. The number of random number values per second symbol at the time of high probability is 200, and the values are “0” to “199”.

  In particular, when the second symbol random number counter C4 makes one round, the initial value of the second symbol random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. The initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is a loop counter similar to the second symbol random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is updated once every timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later. These are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing (see FIG. 12) described later. The second symbol random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once every timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the game ball passes the second start port 34, the second random number counter C4 is updated. 2 Stored in the symbol hold storage area.

  That is, the RAM 503 also has a second symbol holding storage area which is an area different from the first holding ball storage area and the second holding ball storage area. A second symbol holding storage area comprising two symbol holding areas (second symbol holding first to fourth areas) is provided, and in each of these areas, a game to the second start port 34 is provided. Each value of the second symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series in accordance with the winning history of the ball.

  Further, the second symbol out-of-design counter C5 is updated once every time the second symbol control process of the normal process in FIG. 12 described later is executed once, and the value is updated to the second symbol out-of-design symbol of the counter buffer. When the second symbol random number counter C4 stores and updates the second symbol random number counter C4 in the second symbol holding ball storage area, the second symbol outlier symbol counter C5 updated and acquired in the second symbol outlier symbol buffer is also the second symbol. Stored in the holding ball storage area. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10, when the value of the second symbol random number counter C4 is lost, “x” is drawn based on the value of the second symbol off symbol counter C5 in the second symbol holding ball storage area. The displayed display portion 41b is lit up. The second symbol variation display result may be performed based only on the second symbol random number counter C4 without providing the second symbol outlier symbol counter C5. That is, if the second symbol random number counter C4 is won, the display unit 41a on which “O” is drawn is lit up, and if it is lost, the display unit 41b on which “x” is drawn is lit up.

  Thus, since the second symbol lottery has a high probability during the probability variation state and the short time state, it is easy to win the second symbol lottery. When the second symbol lottery is won, the opening frequency of the first start port 33b is higher than that in the normal gaming state, and the opening time of the first start port 33b is longer than that in the normal gaming state. Moreover, if a game ball enters the first start port 33b, the rate per 15R is 100%. Therefore, the player performs a right-handed game aiming at the first start port 33b during the probability change state or the short time state. On the other hand, after the end of the probability change state or the short time state, it is difficult to win the second symbol lottery, and even if the second symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the first start port 33b is shorter than that in the probability change state. Since it is short, it is extremely difficult to enter the first start port 33b. Therefore, the player performs a left-handed game aiming at the first start port 33a after the probability change state or the time-short state ends. In addition, if a left-handed game is performed, a winning to the general winning opening 31a can also be expected.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the CPU 501 is broadly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec), and power failure to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of a signal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the main process is described.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 every 2 msec, for example.

  In FIG. 15, first, in step S601, reading processing of various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Thereafter, in step S602, the first and second initial value random number counters CINI1a and CINI1b and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, the first and second initial value random number counters CINI1a and CINI1b are incremented by 1, and are cleared to “0” when the counter values reach the maximum value (“738” in the present embodiment), The initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to “0” at the time of increment of 1 after the counter value reaches the maximum value (“250” in the present embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first and second initial value random number counters CINI1a and CINI1b are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503 (see FIG. 10).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15, in the subsequent step S603, the first and second jackpot random number counters C1a and C1b, the first and second jackpot symbol counters C2a and C2b, and the first and second stop pattern selection counters C3a and C3b. Perform the update. Specifically, the first and second jackpot random number counters C1a and C1b, the first and second jackpot symbol counters C2a and C2b, and the first and second stop pattern selection counters C3a and C3b are incremented by 1, respectively, When the counter value reaches the maximum value (in this embodiment, “738”, “4”, “250”, respectively), the counter value is cleared to “0” when incremented by one. Then, the updated values of the counters C1a to C3a and C1b to C3b are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503 (see FIG. 10).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 15, in step S604, a start winning process associated with winning in the first start ports 33a and 33b is executed. This start winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 16. In step S701, whether or not the game ball has won the first start opening 33a, 33b is determined based on the detection information of the operation opening switch. If it is determined that the game ball has won the first start opening 33a, 33b, in the subsequent step S702, the first start opening of the first symbol display device 40 in the case of winning the first start opening 33a. It is determined whether or not the number N1 of the operation-reserved balls for 33a is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Further, in the case of winning a prize at the first start opening 33b, is the number N2 of the operation holding balls for the first start opening 33b of the first symbol display device 40 less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment)? Determine whether or not. The first start port 33a, 33b has won a prize, and the number of operation hold balls N1 <4 of the first start port 33a having won the prize or the second start port 33b having won the prize On the condition that the number of reserved balls for operation N2 <4, the process proceeds to step S703, and the number of reserved balls N1, N2 for the first start port 33a or the first start port 33b that has won the prize is incremented by one.

  In subsequent step S704, a random number related to the winning of the first symbol is acquired. Specifically, in the case of winning to the first start opening 33a, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1a, the first jackpot symbol counter C2a and the first stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in step S603 are set as shown in FIG. The first storage area of the first reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 shown in FIG. Further, in the case of winning to the first start opening 33b, the values of the second big hit random number counter C1b, the second big hit symbol counter C2b and the second stop pattern selection counter C3b updated in the step S603 are shown in FIG. It stores in the first area of the free storage area of the second reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 shown. Further, in the case of winning a prize to the second starting port 33b, the values of the second big hit random number counter C1b, the second big hit symbol counter C2b and the second stop pattern selection counter C3b updated in step S603 are shown in FIG. It stores in the first area of the free storage area of the second reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 shown. As described above, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs a lottery to determine whether or not a special gaming state is to be generated based on the establishment of the starting condition by the function of acquiring a random number related to the winning of the first symbol in step S704. That is, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 includes a lottery unit corresponding to the lottery means of the present invention.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15, in the subsequent step S605, a firing control process is executed. Specifically, in the firing control process, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, as shown in FIG. 8, when the firing permission signal S7 from the firing control device 312 is ON, The signal S9 is output to the launch control device 312, and the game ball launch control by the launch device 229 is performed. After performing the firing control process in this way, the CPU 501 once ends this timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interruption, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in the backup area of the RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal S1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process of FIG. The NMI interrupt processing in FIG. 17 is stored in the ROM 502 of the main controller 261. For a predetermined time after the power failure signal S1 is output, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the main controller 261 can be executed, and the NMI interrupt processing is executed within the predetermined time.

  In the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 17, in step S801, information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area. In this embodiment, a power off occurrence information flag is set and stored in the backup area.

Next, the main process will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a main process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. This main process is started upon a reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S101, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes an initial setting process associated with power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. In step S102, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 waits for, for example, about 1 second in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable. Execute. In the subsequent step S103, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 permits RAM access.

  Thereafter, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S104, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided on the power monitoring board 261b is pressed (ON). If there is, the process proceeds to step S114. In the subsequent step S105, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 503 (whether or not a power-off occurrence information flag is set). In step S106, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 calculates a RAM determination value. In the subsequent step S107, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. Whether the backup is valid. The RAM determination value is a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 503, for example. Note that it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 are correctly stored.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S114 and the like). Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the used RAM area is cleared and the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S114). That is, in step S114, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 clears the use area of the RAM 503 to “0” and executes initialization processing of the RAM 503.

  In subsequent step S115, CPU 501 of main controller 261 transmits a payout initialization command. Thus, the payout initialization command is output to the payout control device 311 when the main control device 261 is initialized.

  In step S116, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a power-on command to the sub control board 262a. This power-on command includes a command for determining the model of the pachinko machine, and it is possible to determine the model based on the contents of the command on the sub side such as the sub control board 262a and the display control device 45. It can be done.

  In step S117, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes initial setting of a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit).

  In step S118, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 reads the movable pattern stored in the ROM 502, and drives the distribution movable valve 409 so that the distribution movable valve 409 is driven according to the read movable pattern. Give instructions to the solenoid. Although the movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409 will be described later, the distribution movable valve 409 is set to be driven at a constant cycle. The CPU 501 of the main controller 261 has a function of driving the sorting movable valve 409 according to the movable pattern. That is, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 includes a sorting operation control unit corresponding to the sorting operation control means of the present invention.

  In step S119, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets interrupt permission, and proceeds to normal processing (see FIG. 12) described later.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, the power-off occurrence information is set, and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Execute the process (process when power is restored). That is, in step S108, the information on occurrence of power interruption is cleared. In step S109, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a payout return command to the payout control device 311 and instructs the payout control device 311 to start payout control. As will be described in detail later, when the payout control device 311 receives a payout return command from the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 returns and starts payout control.

  In step S110, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a command for causing the sub-side control device to return to the gaming state when the power is cut off. In step S111, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 receives the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) initial settings. In step S112, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 drives the above-described sorting movable valve 409 at a constant cycle. Furthermore, in step S113, interrupt permission is set, and then the routine proceeds to normal processing (see FIG. 12) described later. For example, even if the power interruption occurs during the normal processing, the power is turned off after executing the last step of the normal processing (the “RAM access prohibited” step shown in FIG. 12). Is executed from step S201, which is the first step of normal processing.

  Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processing of steps S201 to S207 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S210 and S211 is executed with the remaining time.

  In FIG. 12, first, in step S201, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs an external output process of transmitting output data such as a command updated in the previous process to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a winning ball payout command corresponding to the number of acquired game balls is transmitted to the payout control device 311. In addition, since the first symbol display of the first symbol display device 40 (variation display of the two LEDs 40a and 40b) is linked with the third symbol display device 42, the decorative symbol (third symbol) is also displayed. However, when the first symbol display device 40 displays the variation of the first symbol, a variation pattern designation command, a decoration symbol designation command, an all stop command (confirmation command), etc. are transmitted to the sub-control device 262 in the external output process.

  In this pachinko machine 10, external output of normal processing in the order of variation pattern designation command → production command (command for designating change of variation time) → decoration symbol designation command at the start of variation of the first symbol Each time a process is performed, commands are sent at a predetermined number (for example, three) (that is, every three for every 4 msec), and a stop command is sent at the timing of the change time. In addition, after the first symbol variation starts, a predetermined number (for example, three) each time the external output processing of the normal processing is performed in the order of variation pattern designation command → effect command → decorative symbol designation command (that is, 3 every 4 msec). A command may be sent, and a stop command may be sent at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses.

  The variation pattern designation command is a command for designating a variation pattern of a decorative symbol (third symbol) that is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and is transmitted from the sub-control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 controls the third symbol display device 42 to display and execute the decorative symbol variation pattern based on the transmitted variation pattern designation command.

  The decorative symbol designation command is a command for designating whether the variation display effect of the decorative symbol (third symbol) on the third symbol display device 42 is a normal big hit, a short-time big hit, a probable big hit or a miss. . The decoration symbol designation command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and is transmitted from the sub-control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 so that the display result of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol becomes a result corresponding to the transmitted decorative symbol designation command.

  The all stop command is a command for instructing to stop the variation pattern of the decorative symbol (third symbol) displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 42. The all stop command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and is transmitted from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 controls the third symbol display device 42 so as to stop and display the decorative symbol variation pattern based on the transmitted all stop command.

  In addition, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sends a change pattern designation command and an effect command (command for designating change of change time) to the sub-control device 262 in the external output process (step S201) of the normal process. May be sent. That is, based on the value of the variation type counter CS3, it is determined which time the variation time addition (addition time due to the above-described decorative design slip effect) is to be used, and such an addition time is appropriately set in the sub-control device 262. An effect command is used to instruct. Therefore, after the first symbol variation starts, a predetermined number (for example, three) each time the external output processing of the normal processing is performed in the order of variation pattern designation command → effect command → decorative symbol designation command (ie, three every 4 msec). Command), and a stop command may be sent when the fluctuation time has elapsed.

  Next, in step S202, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 updates the variation type counters CS1 to CS3. Specifically, each of the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 is incremented by 1, and each counter value reaches “0” (198, 240, 162 in the present embodiment) and is incremented by “0”. To clear. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area shown in FIG.

  In the subsequent step S203 of FIG. 12, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal, and the lower plate full signal received from the payout control device 311. Thereafter, in step S204, a first symbol variation process for performing variation display of the first symbol by the first symbol display device 40 is executed. By this first symbol variation process, jackpot determination, variation setting of the first symbol, and the like are performed. The details of the first symbol variation process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S205, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes a big prize opening / closing process for opening or closing the big prize opening 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 in the case of the big hit state. That is, the big winning opening 32a is opened for each round in the big hit state, and whether the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 32a has passed for each round, or whether a predetermined number of game balls have been won in the big winning opening 32a. judge. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the special winning opening 32a is stopped and closed during the round, and when there are remaining rounds, the special winning opening 32a is opened repeatedly for the remaining number of rounds.

  In step S206, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes display control of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 41. Briefly, on the condition that the game ball has passed through the second starting port 34, the second symbol random number counter C4 is acquired and the display units 41a and 41b of the second symbol display device 41 each time. Variation display of the second symbol is performed. Then, when the second symbol lottery is carried out based on the value of the second symbol random number counter C4 and the second symbol wins, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, as shown in step S207, displays the first symbol on the lower side. An opening process of the first start port 33b is performed in which the start port 33b is opened for a predetermined time. In the normal gaming state, the first start port 33b is opened for, for example, 1.0 second. In the case of a certain change state or a short time state, the first start port 33b is opened for 3.0 seconds, for example. Although the description is omitted, the second symbol random number counter C4 is also updated by the timer interruption process shown in FIG. 15 in the same manner as the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3. ing.

  In step S208, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 503 (whether or not a power-off occurrence information flag is set). If the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set, the process proceeds to step S209, and if the occurrence information of power interruption is set, the process proceeds to step S212.

  Thereafter, in step S209, it is determined whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. The first and second initial value random number counters CINI1a and CINI1b, the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing is reached. Execute (Steps S210 and S211). That is, in step S210, the first and second initial value random number counters CINI1a and CINI1b and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, each of the first and second initial value random number counters CINI1a and CINI1b is incremented by 1, and at the time of 1 increment after the counter value reaches the maximum value (“738” in the present embodiment). Clear to “0”. Then, the updated values of the first and second initial value random number counters CINI1a and CINI1b are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503, respectively. Similarly, the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and cleared to “0” when incremented by 1 after the counter value reaches the maximum value (“250” in the present embodiment). To do. Then, the updated value of the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In step S211, the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are updated (same as step S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are incremented by 1, and the increment value of the increments after reaching the maximum value (“198”, “240”, “162” in the present embodiment) is increased. Each time it is cleared to "0". Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) and the initial value The value second symbol random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4) can be updated at random.

  In step S208, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is set, and the process proceeds to step S212, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets interrupt inhibition. Subsequently, in step S213, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been quickly turned off to another control device. Subsequently, in step S214, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 stops outputting the control signal. Subsequently, in step S215, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 calculates a RAM determination value and stores it in the backup area. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Subsequently, in step S216, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 prohibits RAM access. After that, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  Next, the first symbol variation process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In FIG. 13, in step S <b> 401, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is currently a big hit. The jackpot includes a special game displayed on the third symbol display device 42 and a predetermined time after the special game is ended. In the subsequent step S402, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the first symbol display device 40 is currently displaying the variation of the first symbol. Then, if the jackpot is not being hit and the variation of the first symbol is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S403, where the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has the number N2 of the operation reserved balls for the first start port 33b of the first symbol display device 40. Is determined to be greater than “0”. If the number N2 of the operation-reserved balls is larger than “0”, the process proceeds to step S404. If the number N2 of the operation-reserved balls is “0”, the process proceeds to step S403a. Proceed to At this time, if the jackpot is being hit or if the number N2 of the operation holding balls is “0” and the number N1 of the operation holding balls is also “0”, this processing is ended as it is.

  In addition, if it is neither the big hit or the change display of the first symbol and if the number N2 of operation hold balls is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 subtracts “1” from the number N2 of active suspension balls. In step S405, a process for shifting the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area to the execution area side. Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area.

  Further, if neither the big hit state nor the fluctuation display of the first symbol is being displayed and the number of the operation suspension balls N2 = 0, the process proceeds to step S403a. The process proceeds to step S404a. In step S404a, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 subtracts “1” from the number N1 of active suspension balls. In step S405a, a process for shifting the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas on hold in the first holding ball storage area to the execution area side. Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area.

  Thereafter, in step S406, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes a change start process. Here, the variation start processing will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 14. In step S501, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is stored in the execution area of the second reserved ball storage area when step S405 is passed. It is determined whether or not the jackpot is based on the value of the second jackpot random number counter C1b. When step S405a is passed, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first big hit random number counter C1a stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area. Specifically, whether or not it is a big hit is, for the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area, the relationship between the value of the first big hit random number counter C1a and its mode (whether it is in a probable state or a normal state) Is determined based on The execution area of the second reserved ball storage area is determined on the basis of the relationship between the value of the second big hit random number counter C1b and the mode at that time (whether it is in the probability variation state or the normal state). As described above, of the numerical values “0” to “738” of the first and second big hit random number counters C1a and C1b at the normal low probability, “350,700” is the winning value (two), and at the high probability of “50” , 101, 160, 209, 257, 310, 361, 418, 480, 517, 578, 635, 677, 730 ”is the winning value (14). The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stores the hit values at the low probability and the high probability of the first big hit random number counter C1a and the second big hit random number counter C1b in the determination table, respectively, and the gaming state is Each change is performed using a corresponding table.

  When the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines that it is a big hit, in step S502, the big hit symbol corresponding to the value of the first big hit symbol counter C2a stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area, that is, Displayed by the two LEDs 40a and 40b of the first symbol display device 40, the blue lighting of both the LEDs 40a and 40b indicating the normal jackpot, or the combined lighting display of the blue lighting of the LED 40a and the red lighting of the LED 40b indicating the jackpot Further, a stop pattern (stop display) is determined which is either the red lighting display of both LEDs 40a and 40b indicating a probable big hit or the combined lighting display of the red lighting of LED 40 and the blue lighting of LED 40b indicating a normal big hit. That is, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the first jackpot symbol counter C2a is obtained based on a table (not shown) indicating the correspondence between the value of the first jackpot symbol counter C2a and the symbol.

  In step S502, in the case of the second reserved ball storage area, the big hit symbol corresponding to the value of the second big hit symbol counter C2b stored in the execution area, that is, two symbols of the first symbol display device 40 are stored. The LEDs 40d and 40e, which are displayed by the LEDs 40d and 40e, are normally turned on in blue, the LED 40c is turned on in combination with the blue lighting of the LED 40c and the red lighting of the LED 40d, or both LEDs 40d and 40e are displayed. The stop symbol (stop display) that is one of the red lighting displays is obtained. That is, based on a table (not shown) indicating the correspondence between the value of the second jackpot symbol counter C2b and the symbol, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the second jackpot symbol counter C2b ("specific hit symbol" or "non-specific symbol"). Find the winning symbol ")".

  Next, in step S503, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines a variation pattern at the big hit (a big hit variation pattern). Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 does not use the first and second stop pattern selection counters C3a and C3b, and in the case of the first reserved ball storage area, the first big hit symbol counter C2a of the execution area. And the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 are checked in that order to determine a variation pattern. In the case of the second reserved ball storage area, the value of the second big hit symbol counter C2b in the execution area and the value of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 are confirmed in that order, and the variation pattern is determined. decide.

  That is, based on the values of the first and second jackpot symbol counters C2a and C2b, whether the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 is displayed as the normal jackpot “stop pattern 3”, or on the third symbol display device 42 It is determined whether to display the decorative symbol of “3” or “stop pattern 4” per hour or shortage or to display the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 as “stop pattern 5” per probability variation. The types of “stop pattern 3” to “stop pattern 5” determined in this way are further determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. That is, a rough decorative pattern variation pattern group such as a reach type of a decorative symbol (third symbol) such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, or the like is determined. Subsequently, one variation pattern is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 from the group of variation patterns of the rough decorative design determined as described above. For example, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, a finer decorative pattern such as a predetermined time is set for the elapsed time until the final stop decorative pattern (in this embodiment, the middle decorative pattern) stops after the reach occurs. The variation mode is determined. The following relationships in the case of jackpot, that is, the relationship between the numerical values of the first and second jackpot symbol counters C2a and C2b and the stop pattern, the relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern, second The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS2 and the stop symbol time is defined in advance by a jackpot table or the like.

  It should be noted that the variation mode is different during the time reduction state, such as the stop symbol time being shorter than in other game states. Therefore, different tables according to the length of the stop symbol time and the like are prepared for the short-time state and other game states. Therefore, when switching from the short-time state to, for example, the normal gaming state, switching from the short-time state stop symbol time determination table to the non-short-time state stop symbol time determination table is performed.

  As described above, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 displays on the third symbol display device 42 from among a plurality of variable display effects that change symbols based on the lottery result in the lottery unit in the above-described step S503. A function of selecting a predetermined variation display effect is provided. That is, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 includes a variable display effect selection unit corresponding to the variable display effect selection unit of the present invention.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S501 that it is not a big hit, in step S504, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines that the symbol is out of place, that is, in the case of the first reserved ball storage area, 2 The stop pattern is set such that the LEDs 40a and 40b are stopped and displayed in different colors. In the case of the second reserved ball storage area, the stop symbol is set such that the two LEDs 40d and 40e of the first symbol display device 40 are stopped and displayed in different colors.

  Next, in step S505, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines a fluctuation pattern (outage effect pattern) at the time of deviation, and sets the deviation fluctuation pattern as a fluctuation pattern designation command. Specifically, in the case of the first reserved ball storage area, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the first stop pattern selection counter C3a and the variation type stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503. The values of the counters CS1 and CS2 are confirmed in that order, and the variation pattern is determined. In the case of the second reserved ball storage area, the values of the second stop pattern selection counter C3b and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the execution area of the second reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 are confirmed in that order. Determine the variation pattern.

  That is, in the case of the first reserved ball storage area, based on the value of the first stop pattern selection counter C3a, and in the case of the second reserved ball storage area, based on the value of the second stop pattern selection counter C3b, the third After the occurrence of reach in the symbol display device 42, after the occurrence of reach, the “stop pattern 1”, which is the “rear and back out reach” in which the last stop decoration symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach decoration symbol after the occurrence of the reach of the decoration symbol. The final stop decorative pattern is “stop pattern 2”, which is “reach other than front / rear detachment” that stops other than before or after the reach decorative pattern, and “stop pattern 0”, which is “completely out” that does not cause reach. Decide what to do. For example, when the determined stop pattern is “stop pattern 1” that is, for example, a front / rear out of reach reach, normal reach, super reach from the front / rear out of reach reach variation pattern group based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. A variation pattern group of rough decorative symbols is determined, for example, a variation pattern in which the reach type of the decorative symbol (third symbol) such as is specified is determined. Here, it is assumed that normal reach is determined. Subsequently, one variation pattern is further determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 from the normal reach variation pattern group of the rough decorative design determined as described above. For example, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, a finer decorative pattern such as a predetermined time is set for the elapsed time until the final stop decorative pattern (in this embodiment, the middle decorative pattern) stops after the reach occurs. The variation mode is determined. It should be noted that the following relationships in the case of deviation, that is, the relationship between the numerical values of the first and second stop pattern selection counters C3a and C3b and the stop pattern, the relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern, The relationship between the numerical value of the 2-variation type counter CS2 and the stop symbol time is defined in advance by a table for detachment or the like.

  In the present embodiment, as one of the above-mentioned tables for detachment, for example, at the time of low probability, in the state of the variable time shortening function of the first symbol display device 40, when the first symbol variation starts. Some are used when the number of pending operations of the first symbol is “0”, and when the values of the first and second stop pattern selection counters C3a and C3b are “0 to 201”, there is no reach (completely "202-208" corresponds to the front / rear reach, and "209-238" corresponds to the reach other than the front / rear.

  Subsequently, in step S506, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the effect time addition, that is, the effect of adding the effect time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in step S503 or the off-variation pattern determined in step S505. Do. More specifically, on the basis of the value of the variation type counter CS3, an increase in the production time due to the sliding stop of the decorative symbol (third symbol) of the middle decorative symbol sequence on the third symbol display device 42 (the middle ornament) A variation pattern including an increase in time until the decorative symbol of the symbol row slides and is stopped and displayed is determined.

  In step S507, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 receives a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the jackpot variation pattern determined in step S503 or a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the outlier variation pattern determined in step S505. Set.

  Subsequently, in step S508, if the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has passed steps S502 and S503, it sets a decorative symbol designation command corresponding to the jackpot symbol of the first symbol display device 40 determined in step S502. If the steps S504 and S505 are performed, the decorative symbol designation command corresponding to the detachable symbol of the first symbol display device 40 determined in step S504 is set.

  Subsequently, in step S509, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets an effect time addition designation command corresponding to the effect time addition determined in step S506, and ends this process.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, if step S402 is YES, that is, if the first symbol variation display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S407, and the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the first symbol variation time has elapsed. Is determined. The variation time of the first symbol is determined based on the variation pattern and the effect time addition determined as described above with reference to FIG. 14, that is, the first symbol according to the variation pattern of the first symbol. The fluctuation time is determined, and when this fluctuation time has elapsed, an affirmative determination is made in step S407. If the variation time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S408, and if the variation time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S409.

  In step S408, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 updates the first symbol variation display on the first symbol display device 40. That is, the variable display of the two LEDs 40a and 40b of the first symbol display device 40 is continued, and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in step S409, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stops the first symbol variation display and sets the first symbol stop symbol to the display symbol. That is, if it is normally determined that the jackpot is determined in step S502 of FIG. 14, after the two LEDs 40a and 40b (or LEDs 40d and 40e) of the first symbol display device 40 are displayed in a variable manner, both the LEDs 40a and 40b (or The LEDs 40d and 40e) are lit in blue to indicate a normal jackpot. When determined to be a time-saving hit, after the fluctuation display of the two LEDs 40a and 40b of the first symbol display device 40, the LED 40a (or LED 40d) is displayed in blue and the LED 40b (or LED 40e) is displayed in red. Shows the jackpot. When it is determined that the probability variation is determined, after the two LEDs 40a and 40b (or LEDs 40d and 40e) of the first symbol display device 40 are displayed, the LEDs 40a and 40b (or LEDs 40d and 40e) are displayed in red. Shows a probable big hit. If the out symbol is determined in step S504 in FIG. 14, the LED 40a (or LED 40d) is displayed in red after the change display of the two LEDs 40a, 40b (or LEDs 40d, 40e) of the first symbol display device 40. At the same time, the LED 40b (or LED 40e) is lit in blue to indicate a disconnection.

  Subsequently, in step S410, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets an all stop command for instructing to stop the variation pattern of the decorative symbol (third symbol) that is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 42, Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311. This main process is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S901, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets a stack address and an interrupt mode. In step S902, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 permits RAM access, and in step S903, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets an external interrupt vector.

  Thereafter, in step S <b> 904, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 513. In step S905, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 calculates a RAM determination value, and in the subsequent step S906, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, that is, the backup is valid. Determine gender. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 513. It should be noted that it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

  Subsequently, in step S907, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs initial setting of the RAM 513 at the time of power recovery. Specifically, when the main control device 261 is initialized, a payout initialization command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 starts payout from the main control device 261. When the reset command is received, initialization of the RAM 513 at the time of power recovery is performed in step S907. That is, the RAM area is initialized, and the control of game ball payout is started.

  Therefore, when the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed (ON) when the power is turned on, the main controller 261 is initialized and a payout initialization command is transmitted from the main controller 261 to the payout controller 311. Accordingly, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs initialization processing of the RAM 513 based on the payout initialization command from the main control device 261.

  Subsequently, in step S908, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs initial setting of peripheral devices of the CPU 511. Specifically, the CPU peripheral device is a timer control device called a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit). This CTC is set to a predetermined value and a timer interrupt is generated every 2 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequently, in step S909, the CPU 511 of the payout control apparatus 311 sets an interrupt permission, and proceeds to a payout control process described later.

  On the other hand, when the occurrence information of the power cut-off is not set in step S904, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S906, the payout control device 311 is similarly configured. The CPU 511 clears the entire area of the RAM 513 to “0” (step S910), and performs initialization processing (step S911).

  Next, the flow of the payout control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In FIG. 19, in step S <b> 1001, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 acquires and stores a command from the main control device 261. Here, as the commands to be stored, 15 types of prize ball commands (15 types of prize ball commands for instructing 1 to 15 payouts) and the start of payout control to the payout control device 311 are instructed. There are 17 types of commands including a payout return command for payout and a payout initialization command for instructing payout initialization to the payout control device 311.

  In step S1002, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not the payout permission has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not a payout return command or a prize ball command is received. In step S1003, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 checks the state return switch (not shown) and executes the state return operation when it is determined that the state return operation is started.

  Thereafter, in step S <b> 1004, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes setting of the lower pan full tank state or the lower pan full tank release state according to the change in the state of the lower pan 15. That is, when the lower pan 15 is detected based on the detection signal of the lower pan full switch, when the lower pan is full, the lower pan full state is set, and when the lower pan full is not reached , Set the lower pan full release state.

  In step S1005, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes setting of a tank ball absence state or a tank ball absence release state according to a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and when there is no tank ball, the setting of the tank ball no state is executed. Perform configuration.

  Thereafter, in step S1006, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines the presence / absence of a notification state, and notifies the 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 311 if there is a notification state.

  In steps S1007 to S1009, prize ball payout processing is executed. In this case, if the prize ball is not paid out and the total number of prize balls stored in step S1001 is not “0” (both NO in steps S1007 and S1008), the process proceeds to step S1009 and a prize ball control process ( FIG. 20) to be described later is started. Further, if the prize ball cannot be paid out or the total number of prize balls is 0 (YES in any of steps S1007 and S1008), the process proceeds to a lending payout process.

  Thereafter, in steps S1010 to S1012, a rental ball payout process is executed. In this case, if it is not possible to pay out the rent and if a rent-out request from the card unit has been received (NO in step S1010, YES in S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012 and a renting control process (described later). FIG. 21) is started. Further, if a rental ball cannot be paid out or a rental ball payout request has not been received (YES in step S1010 or NO in S1011), subsequent vibrator motor control (step S1013) is executed.

  In step S1013, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes control (vibrating motor control) of the vibrator 360 (see FIG. 7). Thereafter, in step S1014, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. If a power failure has occurred, the process proceeds to step S1015; otherwise, the process returns to step S1001. In step S1015, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets information on occurrence of power interruption, and creates a RAM determination value in step S1016. After that, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  Here, in the prize ball control process shown in FIG. 20, in step S1101, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the prize ball payout. In subsequent step S1102, whether the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal is determined based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1103, where the payout motor 358a is driven to execute a retry process and a stop process of the payout motor 358a, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

  If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1104, and whether or not the game ball is normally counted is determined based on the detection result of the payout count switch. If the game ball count is not normal, the process advances to step S1105 to drive the payout motor 358a to execute a retry process and execute a stop process of the payout motor 358a, and then returns to the payout control process of FIG.

  Further, if the game ball count is normal, the process proceeds to step S1106, and it is determined whether or not the game ball count by the payout count switch has reached the total number of prize balls and the payout has been completed. If the payout has been completed, a stop process for the payout motor 358a is executed in step S1107, and then the process returns to the payout control process in FIG.

  In the ball lending control process shown in FIG. 21, in step S1201, the payout motor 358a is driven to pay out the lending ball. In the subsequent step S1202, it is determined from the detection result of the dispensing rotation sensor whether the rotation of the dispensing motor 358a is normal. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1203, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute a retry process, and the stop process of the payout motor 358a is executed. Thereafter, the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

  If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process advances to step S1204 to determine whether or not the game ball is normally counted based on the detection result of the payout count switch. If the game ball count is not normal, the process advances to step S1205 to drive the payout motor 358a to execute a retry process and execute a stop process of the payout motor 358a, and then return to the payout control process of FIG.

  If the game ball count is normal, the process proceeds to step S1206, where it is determined whether or not the game ball count by the payout count switch has reached a predetermined number of rented balls (25) and the payout is completed. If the payout has been completed, a stop process of the payout motor 358a is executed in step S1207, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

  The NMI interrupt process is similarly executed in the payout control device 311, and the state of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like is stored in the backup area of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. Similarly, the power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the payout control device 311 can be executed for a predetermined time after the power failure signal S1 is output. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal S1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process of FIG. 17 is started. The contents are as described in FIG.

  Next, the main process and the normal process of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of a main process executed by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262, and this main process is started upon reset when power is turned on. FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of normal processing executed by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262.

  First, in step S1301, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes an initial setting process associated with power-on. Specifically, port setting (port I / O switching and initial value output), timer setting (1 millisecond interval timer, liquid crystal command strobe output timer), and interrupt setting (subcommand strobe interrupt) are performed. .

  In step S1302, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the power-off process is incomplete. Specifically, it is determined whether various lamps (annular illumination unit 102, central illumination unit 103, etc.) of front frame set 14 of pachinko machine 10 are all turned off and the speaker is in a mute state. Determine. If the power-off process is not completed, the process proceeds to step S1304. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1303.

  Subsequently, in step S1303, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub-control device 262 is destroyed. If it is destroyed, the process proceeds to step S1304. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1307. . In step S1304, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a RAM area read / write check of the sub control device 262. In step S1305, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub control device 262 is normal. If the RAM of the sub-control device 262 is normal, the process proceeds to step S1306, and if abnormal, the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1306, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 writes RAM destruction check data for each area of the RAM 553, and sets RAM destruction check data for determining that there is destruction if there is a reading abnormality.

  In step S1307, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the power is turned on after the power is turned off. If the power is turned on after the power is turned off, the process proceeds to step S1308; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1309.

  In step S1308, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 clears the RAM area other than the unprocessed RAM area. Specifically, the unprocessed RAM area is an area for storing information that causes a problem in the system when the data is cleared, and is an area of information that is desired to remain except when the RAM area is destroyed. For example, a subcommand reception buffer and power-on information can be mentioned. When the main control device 261 is turned off and the sub control device 262 is reset (when a power-off notification command is received from the main control device 261), the RAM area other than the unprocessed RAM area is cleared.

  In step S1309, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets interrupt permission. In step S1310, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the initial value of the RAM of the sub-control device 262, and proceeds to the normal process shown in FIG.

  In step S1311, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 notifies the RAM abnormality and enters an infinite loop. For example, notification such as turning on a predetermined lamp unconditionally can be given.

  As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1401, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the start of normal processing. If 1 ms or longer has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1402, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1410.

  In step S1402, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs lamp output processing. Specifically, lamp output is performed in accordance with the variation pattern effect of the decorative symbol (third symbol) on the third symbol display device 42.

  In step S1403, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs power-on notification. Specifically, notification for 30 seconds is performed by a power-on command.

  In step S1404, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a customer waiting effect. Specifically, the title / still image is switched. That is, a so-called demonstration screen display is performed.

  In step S1405, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs the number-of-holds display update process for the first symbol variation. Specifically, since the number-of-holds display update process is a process for performing the display corresponding to the hold lamp 40c of the first symbol display device 40 also on the third symbol display device 42, the update of the first symbol display device 40 is performed. In the case of a pachinko machine that displays only with the holding lamp 40c, this processing is not necessary.

  In step S1406, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs frame button input monitoring / effect processing. Specifically, this frame button input monitoring / production process is for performing a machine-specific production by pressing the frame button 20 in a pachinko machine having the frame button 20 that can be pressed by the player. Therefore, in a pachinko machine that does not include such a frame button 20, this process is unnecessary.

  In step S1407, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs lamp editing processing. Specifically, a process of editing the lamp lighting pattern corresponding to (synchronized with) the decorative pattern variation pattern effect on the third symbol display device 42 is performed.

  In step S1408, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs sound editing / output processing. Specifically, processing is performed to sound a sound corresponding to (synchronized with) the decorative pattern variation pattern effect on the third symbol display device 42.

  In step S1409, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a liquid crystal effect execution management process. Specifically, time management is performed to synchronize the lamp, sound, and liquid crystal effect (decorative pattern effect pattern effect on the third symbol display device 42).

  In step S1410, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs processing for updating the decorative symbol variation pattern to be performed by the third symbol display device 42 and the random number value for determining the sound lamp effect. Specifically, for example, this random number takes a value of “0” to “32767” and returns to “0” when the upper limit value “37268” is reached.

  In step S1411, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs processing corresponding to each command when receiving a command from the main control device 261.

  Specifically, when the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives a variation pattern designation command from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 converts the variation pattern designation command into a command and transmits it to the display control device 45. Note that the variation pattern designation command may be output as it is. In addition, when the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives the special decoration designating command from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 transmits the special decoration designating command and the notice effect command to the display control device 45. The notice command includes, for example, the presence or absence of the appearance of a school of fish as a notice. Further, when the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives a total stop command (confirmation command) from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 transmits the total stop command to the display control device 45 as it is.

  In step S1412, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub control device 262 is destroyed. If the RAM is not destroyed, the process returns to step S1401, and if the RAM is destroyed, an infinite loop is entered.

  In the display control device 45, the decoration to be performed by the third symbol display device 42 based on each command (variation pattern designation command, decoration special symbol designation command, notice effect command, all stop command) from the sub-control device 262. Image generation control of the pattern variation pattern is performed. Specifically, the display control device 45 executes image generation processing for the decorative symbol variation pattern in the third symbol display device 42, for example, generates an image at a frame rate of 30 (30 images per second), By storing these generated images in the video RAM 524 (for example, a frame buffer) and displaying them appropriately on the third symbol display device 42, the decorative symbol variation display on the third symbol display device 42 is realized. ing.

  Next, the special winning opening / closing process performed by the main controller 261 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening / closing process by the main controller 261. The normal process shown in FIG. 12 by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 is also provided with a special prize opening / closing process (step S205) as described above.

  In step S1451, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not the first and second big hit random number counters C1a and C1b are hit. The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 proceeds to step 1452 if it is a win, and ends this process if it is not.

  In step S1452, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits an opening command for executing an opening effect informing the start of the big hit round game to the sub-control device 262, and proceeds to step S1453.

  In step S1453, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 controls the large winning opening solenoid that opens and closes the door member 32b in order to open the door member 32b of the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning apparatus 32, and performs a timer function. Use to start timing the opening time. In addition, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a round number designation command to inform the sub-control device 262 of what number the big hit round to be started is.

  In step S1454, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 detects whether or not a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls has been won in the big winning opening of the variable winning device 32, and the time for the release time is the maximum release time. (For example, 30 seconds) is detected, and when a predetermined number of game balls have been won in the big prize opening of the variable prize winning device 32, or when the opening time is counted (counting up) the maximum opening time If it has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1455. If a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have not yet won in the big winning opening of the variable winning device 32, or if the time for opening has not reached the maximum opening time, the process returns to step S1454.

  In step S1455, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 controls the big prize opening solenoid so as to close the big prize opening door member 32b of the variable prize winning device 32, and stops timing of the opening time, and step S1456. Proceed to

  In step S1456, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 controls the big prize opening solenoid so as to continue the closed state of the big prize opening during a predetermined interval time of the corresponding round.

  Thereafter, in step S1457, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not there is a next round. If there is a next round, the process returns to step S1453, and if there is no next round, the process proceeds to step S1458.

  In step S1458, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits an ending command for executing an ending effect informing the end of the jackpot round game to the sub-control device 262, and ends this processing.

  Next, the movable pattern suggestion effect performed by the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a liquid crystal effect execution management process by the sub-control device 262. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an open / close mode (big hit) display setting process by the sub-control device 262. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing music start timing adjustment processing by the sub-control device 262. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing game processing during a round by the sub-control device 262.

(LCD production execution management process)
In step S1501, as shown in FIG. 25, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs an open / close mode (big hit) display setting process. In step S1502, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a variable display mode setting process.

(Open / close mode (big hit) display setting process)
In step S1601, as shown in FIG. 26, if the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has received the opening command transmitted from the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 in step S1452, the process proceeds to step S1602. The process proceeds to S1605.

  In step S1602, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display opening command, and proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a music start timing adjustment process.

  In step S1604, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display jackpot effect command at the music start timing adjusted in step S1603. The display jackpot effect command is a command for selecting a predetermined jackpot effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 from a plurality of patterns of jackpot effects displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the jackpot state. It is. That is, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 includes a display effect control unit (function to execute the process of step S1604).

  In step S1605, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 designates that the jackpot round to be started is the first round based on the round number designation command transmitted from the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 in step S1453. A round number display command for displaying the “1R” image on the third symbol display device 42 is set.

  In step S1606, if the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives the ending command transmitted from the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 in step S1458, the process proceeds to step S1607; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1608.

  In step S1606, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display ending command and ends this processing.

  In step S1608, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a game process during round, which will be described later.

(Music start timing adjustment process)
The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 is an effect including the display of an operation request image requesting the operation of the second frame button 21, and the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position when the operation request image is displayed. Control is performed so that the movable pattern suggesting effect in accordance with the timing is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has a function of performing a movable pattern suggesting effect (a function of executing processing in steps S1701 to S1713 described later). That is, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 includes an operation effect control unit.

  In step S1701, as shown in FIG. 27, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 analyzes the contents of the opening command and determines whether there are 16 rounds in the jackpot state. When the number of rounds is 16, it is necessary to perform music start timing adjustment processing because a movable pattern suggestion effect is performed. Therefore, when the number of rounds is 16, the process proceeds to step S1702. On the other hand, when the number of rounds is not 16 rounds, basically, the movable pattern suggestion effect is not performed as described below, so that it is not necessary to perform the music start timing adjustment process. Therefore, when the number of rounds is not 16 rounds, this process is terminated.

  The reason why the music start timing adjustment process is not performed when the number of rounds is not 16 rounds is, for example, sufficient in order to execute a movable pattern suggestion effect start in a case where a game ball is not held in the holding device 400 in a big hit state with a small number of rounds This is because time may not be secured. Even in the big hit state with a small number of rounds, the game ball may be held in the holding device 400. In this case, if the start of the movable pattern suggestion effect is not performed, the player may not feel attractive to the holding device 400. Therefore, in the case of the big hit state with a small number of rounds, as described later in the second embodiment, the start of the movable pattern suggestion effect may be executed during the variable display effect such as the reach effect.

  In step S1702, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 acquires the time (delay time) from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 to the reception time of the opening command, and the storage area p of the RAM 553 Remember me. In order to acquire this delay time, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 is provided with a count function that counts in synchronization with the movable period of the sorting movable valve 409.

  In step S1703, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 analyzes the received opening command and stores the time required for the opening effect in the storage area q of the RAM 553. In step S1704, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the total time obtained by adding the delay time stored in the storage area p and the time required for the opening effect stored in the storage area q in the storage area r of the RAM 553. . The total time stored in the storage area r corresponds to the time from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 until the door member 32b first opens after the opening effect ends.

  In step S1705, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the total time stored in the storage area r is greater than 15 seconds corresponding to a half cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409, and 15 seconds If greater than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1706, and if the total time is less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1714.

  In step S1706, it is determined whether or not the total time stored in the storage area r matches 30 seconds corresponding to one cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409. If the total time is equal to 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1707, and if it is not equal to 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1711.

  In step S1707, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts the image and sound of the music piece A after the time required for the opening effect stored in the storage area q has elapsed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes a movable pattern suggestion effect with the music A after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the music A.

  In step S1708, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S1709 if the total time stored in the storage area r is greater than 15 seconds and less than 30 seconds, and otherwise proceeds to step S1711.

  In step S1709, a time obtained by reducing the total time stored in the storage area r from 30 seconds corresponding to one period of the movable period of the sorting movable valve 409 is stored in the storage area s. In step S1710, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts the image and sound of the music piece A after the time stored in the storage area q and the time stored in the storage area s have elapsed. Note that the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes a movable pattern suggestion effect with the music A after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the music A.

In step S1711, if the total time stored in storage area r is greater than 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1712. In step S1712, the following calculation is performed and stored in the storage area s.
s = 15 seconds- (total time stored in storage area r-30 seconds)
15 seconds is a time corresponding to a half cycle of the movable cycle, and 30 seconds is a time corresponding to one cycle of the movable cycle.

  In step S1713, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts the image and sound of the music B after the time stored in the storage area q and the time stored in the storage area s have elapsed. Note that the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes a movable pattern suggestion effect with the music B after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the music B.

In step S <b> 1714, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the total time stored in the storage area r is equal to 15 seconds corresponding to a half cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409. If the total time is equal to 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1715, and if the total time is shorter than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1716.

  In step S1715, after the time required for the opening effect stored in the storage area q has elapsed, the image and sound of the music B are started. In step S1716, a time obtained by reducing the total time stored in the storage area r from 15 seconds corresponding to a half period of the movable period of the sorting movable valve 409 is stored in the storage area s. In step S1717, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts the image and sound of the music B after the time stored in the storage area q and the time stored in the storage area s have elapsed. Note that the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes a movable pattern suggesting effect with the music A after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the music B.

  As described above, when the music A or the music B cannot start from the start timing of the movable cycle (r = 30 seconds) or the half cycle timing of the movable movable valve 409 (r = 15 seconds), the opening effect is displayed. After the time stored in the storage area s has elapsed since the end time, the music A or music B is started, so that the start timing of the music A or music B and the start timing or half cycle of the movable period of the sorting movable valve 409 The timing can be matched. Thereby, the movable pattern suggestion effect in which the rhythm of the music A or the music B and the movable timing of the sorting movable valve 409 are matched can be executed.

(Game processing during the round)
Next, game processing during a round will be described.

  In step S1751, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 analyzes the content of the round number designation command sent from the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, and determines whether or not the round number designation command for the second and subsequent rounds has been received. . If the round number designation command is a command after the second round, the process proceeds to step S1752, and for example, a round number display command for displaying the “2R” image designating the second round on the third symbol display device 42 is displayed. set. If the round number designation command for the second and subsequent rounds has not been received, this processing is terminated.

  In step S1753, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a movable pattern suggestion effect process executed during the movable pattern suggestion effect. In the movable pattern suggestion effect process, for example, when the second frame button 21 is operated in accordance with the suggestion timing during the movable pattern suggestion effect, if the timing is correct, an image indicating that the timing is correct is displayed. Display or output correct sound. If the timing is not correct, an image indicating that the timing is not correct is displayed or an incorrect sound is output.

  In step S1754, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether a round end command has been received from the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. If a round end command has been received, the process advances to step S1755 to delete the round number display. If the round end command has not been received, this process ends.

  Next, the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. FIG. 29 is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1 showing the relationship between the movable timing of the sorting movable valve 409 in the big hit state and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect. FIG. 30 is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 2 in the big hit state. FIG. 31 is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 3 in the big hit state. FIG. 32 is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 4 in the big hit state.

(Moving pattern suggestion production example 1 in the big hit state)
The movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409 will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, the movable pattern of the sorting movable valve 409 is started when the gaming machine is turned on, and the movable pattern A is executed for 15 seconds, and the movable pattern B is executed for 15 seconds thereafter. Is a pattern of one cycle of 30 seconds. Hereinafter, one period is referred to as a movable period. Specifically, the movable pattern A has two seconds (t1), four seconds (t2), seven seconds (t3), ten seconds (t4), and eleven seconds (t5) after the start of each movable cycle. After 13 seconds (t6), the sorting movable valve 409 changes from the retracted position to the protruding position, maintains the protruding position for about 0.3 seconds, and then changes from the protruding position to the retracted position. The movable pattern B is 16 seconds after start (t7), 20 seconds (t8), 21 seconds (t9), 22 seconds (t10), 26 seconds (t11), 29 seconds (t12), The distribution movable valve 409 changes from the retracted position to the protruding position, maintains the protruding position for about 0.3 seconds, and then changes from the protruding position to the retracted position. Hereinafter, t1 to t12 are referred to as movable timings t1 to t12.

  Here, the entrance detection to the first start ports 33a and 33b occurs at a certain point in the gaming state, and the lottery result based on the entrance detection is a result of a 16-round big hit state, and the variable display time is It is 60 seconds, and the jackpot opening time from the end of the fluctuation to the start of the jackpot state is assumed to be 5 seconds.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display based on the lottery result starts at the same timing as the movable timing t6, and ends 60 seconds later at the same timing as the movable timing t6. Thereafter, the jackpot opening effect is started, and after 5 seconds, the jackpot opening effect ends with a slight delay from the movable timing t7. After the end of the jackpot opening effect, the big winning opening 32a is opened, and the first round of the jackpot state is started.

  During the jackpot state, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 displays a jackpot effect image composed of the video of the music and the music of the music output from the speaker on the third symbol display device 42. In the jackpot effect image, in the case of a 16-round jackpot state, two types of music A and music B that require about 3 to 4 minutes from the start to the end of the music are set.

  The movable pattern suggestion effect is set to start the movable pattern suggestion effect 90 seconds after the start of the music A in the 16-round jackpot effect image (that is, the video and music of the music A). The reason is that the movable pattern suggestion effect is started after the maximum number of reserving games (5 balls) is reserved in the sorting device 400. Specifically, assuming that the game ball launching device 38 launches one game ball per second, if the player continuously launches the game balls immediately after the start of the big hit state, the minimum is 75 seconds. Later, the holding device 400 reaches the maximum holding number. As described above, in the sorting device 400, one game ball is held in 15 of the game balls launched toward the big prize opening 32a. Therefore, the movable pattern suggestion effect is set to start at least 75 seconds after the start of the big hit state.

  Here, the end timing of the jackpot opening time is in the middle of the movable cycle, that is, in the middle of the movable pattern B. In this case, if the music A or the music B is started immediately after the jackpot opening time elapses, the suggestion timing in the later-described movable pattern suggestion effect included in the music A or the music B does not coincide with the movable timing in each movable pattern. Therefore, the start timing of the music A or the music B is adjusted so that the start timing of the music A or the music B matches the start timing of the movable pattern.

  The adjustment of the start timing of the music A or the music B is the time (hereinafter referred to as a delay time) p from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle to the reception time of the opening command from the time of the movable cycle of 30 seconds, The start time of the music piece A is delayed by a time s (hereinafter referred to as an adjustment time s) obtained by subtracting the total time r from the opening effect time q. Specifically, after performing an effect (hereinafter referred to as an adjustment effect) that delays the start timing of the music piece A for 12 seconds (s time) obtained by subtracting 18 seconds (total time r) from 30 seconds of the movable cycle, The music A is started at the start timing of the movable pattern A.

  During the adjustment time s, a display effect is performed to keep the player from getting bored. For example, a video introducing a singer who sings the music A, a digest video summarizing the music A, and the like. The video ends when the adjustment time s has elapsed. A plurality of types of images may be prepared in accordance with the adjustment time s. Such a video is also included in the jackpot production.

  As described above, when the original display start timing of the jackpot effect image (that is, the video and music of the music piece A) is in the middle of the movable cycle, that is, in the middle of the movable pattern B, the start timing of the music piece A is set. By performing the effect of delaying the adjustment time s, the timing at which the music A is actually started coincides with the start timing of the movable pattern A. Thereby, in the movable pattern suggestion effect started 90 seconds after the start of the jackpot effect by the music A, the movable timing constituting the movable pattern A coincides with the suggested timing at which the operation request image indicating the movable timing is displayed. To do.

  The movable pattern suggestion effect executed in the music A is a rhythm game in which the player hits the second frame button 21 in accordance with the rhythm of the music A in the middle of the music A. Therefore, the movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409 is set so that at least a part thereof coincides with a part of any rhythm of the music piece A. Specifically, five movable timings t2 to t6 in the movable pattern A coincide with a part of the rhythm of the music piece A. In other words, the suggestion timing st1 to the suggestion timing st5 associated with the movable timing t2 to the timing t6 is set in advance for the jackpot effect by the music piece A.

  Each suggestion timing is set slightly earlier than the movable timing of the sorting movable valve 409. Each suggestion timing is set based on the time until the game ball discharged from the holding unit 403 reaches the sorting movable valve 409 in a state where the holding state switching piece 405 is switched to the discharging position. Each suggestion timing and its setting method will be described later in detail.

(Moveable pattern suggestion effect example 2 in the big hit state)
Next, as shown in FIG. 30, the symbol variation display based on the lottery result is started at the same timing as the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1 as in the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1, but the variable display time is the movable pattern suggestion effect example. It is assumed that 72 seconds is 12 seconds longer than 1 (60 seconds). That is, the symbol variation display ends at a timing delayed by 3 seconds from the movable timing t10. Since the jackpot opening effect is assumed to be 5 seconds as in the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1, the end time of the jackpot opening effect coincides with the end timing of the movable cycle.

  In this case, if the music A is started in accordance with the start of the jackpot state, 90 seconds after the start of the music A at which the movable pattern suggesting effect is started without performing an adjustment effect that delays the start timing of the music A The movable timings t2 to t6 constituting the movable pattern A coincide with the suggestion timings st1 to st5.

(Example 3 of moving pattern suggestion during jackpot)
Next, as shown in FIG. 31, the symbol variation display based on the lottery result is started at the same timing as the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1 as in the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1, but the variable display time is the movable pattern suggestion effect example. It is assumed that 51 seconds is 9 seconds shorter than 1 (60 seconds). That is, the symbol variation display ends at the same timing as the movable timing t2 4 seconds after the start of the movable cycle. Since the jackpot opening effect is assumed to be 5 seconds as in the movable pattern suggesting effect example 1, the jackpot opening effect is in the middle of the movable cycle, that is, in the middle of the movable pattern A. Therefore, in the movable pattern suggestion effect example 3, as in the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1, the adjustment effect is displayed prior to the start of the music.

  Specifically, an adjustment time s (subtracting the total time r (9 seconds) of the delay time p (4 seconds) and the opening effect time q (5 seconds) from the time 15 seconds corresponding to a half cycle of the movable cycle. After performing the adjustment effect for 6 seconds, the music B is started in accordance with the start timing of the movable pattern B.

  The movable pattern suggestion effect executed in the music B is an operation effect that causes the player to tap the second frame button 21 in accordance with the rhythm of the music B in the middle of the music B. Therefore, the movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409 is set so that at least a part thereof coincides with a part of any rhythm of the music B. Specifically, five movable timings t8 to t12 in the movable pattern B coincide with a part of the rhythm of the music B. In other words, the suggestion timing st6 to the suggestion timing st10 associated with the movable timing t8 to the timing t12 are preset in the jackpot effect by the music B.

  By starting the movable pattern suggestion effect 90 seconds after the start of the music B, the movable timings t7 to t11 constituting the movable pattern B coincide with the suggestion timings st6 to st10. The suggestion timings st6 to st10 and the setting method thereof are the same as in the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1.

(Moving pattern suggestion effect example 4 in big hit state)
Next, as shown in FIG. 32, the symbol variation display based on the lottery result starts at the same timing as the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1 as in the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1, but the variable display time is the movable pattern suggestion effect example. It is assumed that it is 55 seconds shorter than 1 (60 seconds) by 5 seconds. That is, the symbol variation display ends at the same timing as the movable timing t4. Since the jackpot opening effect is assumed to be 5 seconds as in the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1, the end time of the jackpot opening effect coincides with the end timing of the movable pattern A.

  In this case, if the music B is started in accordance with the start of the jackpot state, 90 seconds after the start of the music B where the movable pattern suggesting effect is started without performing an adjustment effect that delays the start timing of the music B The movable timings t7 to t11 constituting the movable pattern B coincide with the suggestion timings st6 to st10.

  Next, the suggestion timings st1 to st5 in the movable pattern suggestion effect example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33 is a timing chart showing the suggestion timings st1 to st5 and an example of the operation timing of the second frame button 21. FIG. 34 is a timing chart following FIG. FIG. 35 is a timing chart following FIG. In addition, the suggestion images (a) to (p) in FIGS. 32A to 35 correspond to images displayed during the movable pattern suggestion effects in FIGS. 36 to 39 described later. doing.

  Moreover, the movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 42 in a big hit state is demonstrated using FIGS. 36-39. 36 (a) and 36 (b) are diagrams showing a movable pattern suggesting effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the big hit state. 37 (c) and 37 (d) are diagrams showing the movable pattern suggestion effect following FIG. FIGS. 38E to 38J are diagrams showing the movable pattern suggestion effect following FIG. 39 (k) to 39 (p) are diagrams showing the movable pattern suggestion effect following FIG.

  In the movable pattern suggestion effects in the movable pattern suggestion effects examples 1 and 2, the movable timing t1 is not suggested, and the movable timings t2 to t6 are suggested. This is because an image for explaining the rhythm game in the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed in the period up to the suggestion timing corresponding to the movable timing t2, as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the third symbol display device 42 displays the current value for 2.0 seconds from 0.0 second after the start of the movable pattern A to 2.0 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A. An image (a) explaining the rhythm game is displayed so as to overlap the image of the music A or the music B being displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36 (a), a character image “Please hit the drum button in time with the rhythm game rhythm” is displayed. Further, on the third symbol display device 42, a round number image 421 indicating that the jackpot state is being displayed is displayed. Here, an image (9R) indicating the ninth round is displayed. In the following description, although not specifically described, it is assumed that the image of the music A or the music B displayed at that time is displayed behind each image constituting the movable pattern suggestion effect.

  Next, an image (b) informing the start of the rhythm game is displayed for 1.0 second from 2.0 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 3.0 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36B, an operation explanation image 423 for explaining the operation and an operation timing image 425 simulating the shape of the second frame button 21 (taiko shape) for notifying the operation timing are displayed. Is done. The operation explanation image 423 displays an explanatory note “When the Hit! Mark is over the drum, please hit the drum button”.

  The rhythm game in the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1 is executed in 11.0 seconds from 3.0 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 14.0 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A. For 0.85 seconds from 3.00 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 3.85 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A, the first operation request image 431 in which the characters “Hit!” Are displayed is the operation timing image. A moving image (c) approaching 425 is displayed (see FIG. 37 (c)). An image (d) in which the first operation request image 431 is completely overlapped with the operation timing image 425 for 0.50 seconds from 3.85 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 4.35 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A (hereinafter referred to as “d”). , Referred to as an overlapping image) is displayed (see FIG. 37D). Thereafter, the first operation request image 431 moves away from the operation timing image 425, and an image (e) disappearing from the display screen is displayed (see FIG. 38 (e)). The time during which the overlapping image is displayed corresponds to the suggestion timing st1.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the second operation in which the characters “Hit!” Are displayed for 0.95 seconds from 6.00 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 6.95 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A. A moving image (f) in which the request image 432 approaches the operation timing image 425 is displayed (see FIG. 38 (f)). An image (g) in which the second operation request image 432 completely overlaps the operation timing image 425 is displayed in 0.4 seconds from 6.95 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 7.35 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A. (See FIG. 38 (g)). Thereafter, the second operation request image 432 moves away from the operation timing image 425, and an image (h) disappearing from the display screen is displayed (see FIG. 38 (h)). The time during which this overlapping image is displayed corresponds to the suggestion timing st2.

  In 0.95 seconds from 9.00 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 9.95 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A, the third operation request image 433 in which the characters “Hit!” Are displayed is the operation timing image. A moving image (i) approaching 425 is displayed (see FIG. 38 (i)). An image in which the third operation request image 433 completely overlaps the operation timing image 425 in 0.4 seconds from 9.95 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 10.35 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A, “Hit! A moving image (j) in which the fourth operation request image 434 in which the characters “” are represented approaches the operation timing image 425 is displayed (see FIG. 38J). The time during which this overlapping image is displayed corresponds to the suggestion timing st3.

  In FIG. 38 (j) and FIG. 39 (k) described later, since the ninth round is completed, the round number image 421 indicating the ninth land is deleted and an interval time of 1.0 second is interposed. . In FIG. 39 (l) and later to be described later, since the tenth land is started, the round number image 421 is changed to “10R”.

  The third operation request image 433 moves away from the operation timing image 425 and disappears from the display screen for 0.6 seconds from 10.35 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 10.95 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A. A moving image (k) in which the fourth operation request image 434 further approaches the operation timing image 425 is displayed (see FIG. 39 (k)). As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the fourth operation request image 434 is displayed in the operation timing image 425 in 0.4 seconds from the start of the movable pattern A 10.95 seconds to the start of the movable pattern A 11.35 seconds. The image (l) that completely overlaps with (1) is displayed (see FIG. 39 (l)). Thereafter, the fourth operation request image 434 moves away from the operation timing image 425, and an image (m) disappearing from the display screen is displayed (see FIG. 29 (m)). The time during which the overlapping image is displayed corresponds to the suggestion timing st4.

  In 0.95 seconds from 12.00 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 12.95 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A, the fifth operation request image 435 in which the characters “Hit!” Are displayed is the operation timing image. A moving image (n) approaching 425 is displayed (see FIG. 39 (n)). An image (o) in which the fifth operation request image 435 completely overlaps the operation timing image 425 is displayed in 0.5 seconds from 12.95 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 13.45 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A. (See FIG. 39 (o)). Thereafter, the fifth operation request image 435 moves away from the operation timing image 425, and an image (p) disappearing from the display screen is displayed (see FIG. 39 (p)). The time during which the overlapping image is displayed corresponds to the suggestion timing st5.

  After 14.0 seconds from the start of the movable pattern A, the fifth operation request image 435 and the operation timing image 425 disappear, and the image of the music piece A is displayed again. Note that the rhythm game described above may be displayed overlaid on the image of the music A, or the image of the music A may be displayed in a reduced size in the corner of the display screen and the image of the rhythm game may be displayed in the center of the display screen. Good.

  The image displayed during the movable pattern suggestion effect is not limited to the image described above. For example, an image indicating the number of game balls held in the holding device 400 may be displayed. In that case, a sensor for counting the number of game balls held in the holding device 400 is attached to the main body part 401 of the game board 30 or the holding device 400, and the main control device 261 or the sub control device 262 has a holding device. A function of counting and displaying the number of game balls held at 400 is provided. Further, for example, the sub-control device 262 is configured to receive a pressing signal of the second frame button 21, so that the timing is correct when the second frame button 21 is operated during the display time of the overlapped image. When the second frame button 21 is operated at a timing deviating from the display time of the overlapped image, for example, an image indicating that the image is displayed (for example, an image of a musical note indicating the correct sound) or outputting a correct sound. An image indicating that they are not correct (for example, an image in which a note indicating an incorrect sound is marked with an X) may be displayed or an incorrect sound may be output.

  Next, a method of setting the suggestion timings st1 to st5 (that is, the overlapping image display time) described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35 again.

  The display time of the overlapping image is set in consideration of the response time of the second frame button 21, the operation time of the discharge prevention valve 406, the falling time of the game ball, the position of the sorting movable valve 409, and the like. For example, the sorting movable valve 409 performs the above-described protruding operation and retracting operation from 0.0 second to 0.9 second after the start of each movable timing. At each movable timing, the time during which the game ball dropped by the distribution movable valve 409 can be placed and guided to the general winning opening 31b is determined from the timing at which the tip of the distribution movable valve 409 protrudes to the position P2. The time until the tip returns to position P2, that is, 0.50 seconds from 0.20 seconds after the start of each movable timing to 0.70 seconds after the start of each movable timing.

  The time from the timing when the player presses the second frame button 21 (for example, tm1A) to the timing when the discharge prevention valve 406 starts driving to the discharge position (for example, tm1B) is 0.10 seconds, and the discharge prevention valve 406 is Assuming that the time from the timing of starting the operation (for example, tm1B) to the timing of the gaming ball discharged from the holding unit 403 landing on the distributing movable valve 409 (for example, tm1C) is 0.25 seconds, the distributing movable valve 409 is If the display of the overlapping image (d) is started at least 0.35 seconds before the timing of projecting to the position P2 (that is, 0.15 seconds before the start of the movable timing), the player displays the overlapping image (d). Even if the second frame button 21 is pressed at the start timing tm1A, the game ball discharged from the holding unit 403 is placed on the sorting movable valve 409, and the general input It can be induced in the mouth 31b. Therefore, the overlapping image display start timing at the suggestion timings st2 to st6 is 0.35 seconds before the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 protrudes to the position P2 at the movable timings t2 to t6 (that is, the start of each movable timing). 0.15 seconds ago).

  In addition, the display timing of overlapping images at the suggestion timings st2 to st6 is the time (0.10 seconds) from when the player presses the second frame button 21 until the discharge prevention valve 406 starts driving to the discharge position. ) And the time (0.25 seconds) from the start of the operation of the discharge prevention valve 406 until the game ball discharged from the holding unit 403 lands on the distribution movable valve 409. It is set 0.35 seconds before the timing when the valve 409 returns to the position P2 (that is, 0.35 seconds after the start of each movable timing at the movable timings t2 to t6). That is, the display time of the overlap image is set to 0.50 seconds in accordance with the time during which the game ball with the sorting movable valve 409 falling can be placed and guided to the general winning award 31b.

  Thus, by considering the response time of the second frame button 21, the operation time of the discharge prevention valve 406, the falling time of the game ball, the position of the sorting movable valve 409, etc., the suggestion timings st1 to st5 in the movable pattern suggestion effect Can be set to a predetermined time.

  Next, when the second frame button 21 is operated at an arbitrary timing during the movable pattern suggestion effect (for example, timings tm1A to tm5A shown in FIGS. 33 to 35), the game balls discharged from the holding device 400 Will be described as to whether or not to ride on the distribution movable valve 409 (that is, whether or not it is guided to the general winning award 31b).

  When the second frame button 21 is pressed at the display start timing tm1A of the overlapping image, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 is distributed at the same timing tm1C as the timing at which the distribution movable valve 409 protrudes to the position P2. It reaches the surface of the movable valve 409, is guided to the general winning opening 31b, and wins the general winning opening 31b (see also FIGS. 42 and 43 described later).

  When the second frame button 21 is pressed at the timing tm2A 0.25 seconds after the start of the overlapping image display, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 maintains the maximum projecting position P3 of the distribution movable valve 409. At the timing tm2B, the surface of the sorting movable valve 409 is reached, guided to the general winning port 31b, and won to the general winning port 31b. In addition, when the second frame button 21 is pressed at timing tm3A 0.35 seconds after the start of displaying the overlapped image, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 is at a timing later than the timing tm2B described above. However, it reaches the surface of the sorting movable valve 409 at the timing tm3B while the sorting movable valve 409 maintains the maximum protruding position P3, is guided to the general winning port 31b, and wins the general winning port 31b. .

  In addition, when the second frame button 21 is pressed at the timing tm4A of displaying the overlapped image, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 is the same timing as when the sorting movable valve 409 returns from P3 to the position P2. At tm4C, it reaches the surface of the distribution movable valve 409, is guided to the general winning opening 31b, and wins the general winning opening 31b. On the other hand, when the second frame button 21 is pressed at the timing tm5A (timing after the display of the overlapped image) 0.55 seconds after the display of the overlapped image is started, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 Falls to the same height as the surface of the distribution movable valve 409 at the timing when the distribution movable valve 409 is shifted from the position P2 to the position P1, so that it does not get on the distribution movable valve 409 and is guided to the general winning port 31b. (See also FIGS. 46 and 47 described later).

  It is also conceivable that the player repeatedly hits the second frame button 21 aiming at the time when the overlapping image is displayed. In this case, only when the second frame button 21 can be continuously hit within the time during which the overlapping image is displayed, the game ball dropped from the holding unit 403 is placed on the sorting movable valve 409 and placed in the general winning opening 31b. You may be able to guide. The pressing of the second frame button 21 may be valid only for the first time within the time when one overlapping image is displayed.

  Next, the lower right game area 30a3 of the game board in which the movable pattern suggestion effect in the big hit state is being executed will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing the lower right game area 30a3 of the game board in which the movable pattern suggestion effect is being executed in the big hit state. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a state in which the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 shown in FIG. 40 enters the general winning opening 31b. FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view showing a state where the decorative plate 413 is removed from the holding device 400 of FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the decorative plate 413 is removed from the holding device 400 of FIG. FIG. 44 shows a lower right game area 30a2 similar to FIG. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a state in which the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 shown in FIG. 44 is not entered into the general winning opening 31b. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view showing a state where the decorative plate 413 is removed from the holding device 400 of FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the decorative plate 413 is removed from the holding device 400 of FIG.

  If the player can successfully tap the second frame button 21 in accordance with the suggestion timing st1 to the suggestion timing st5, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 is in the protruding position as shown in FIGS. It is possible to place a prize on the distribution movable valve 409 and win the prize winning 30b from the distribution movable valve 409.

  On the other hand, when the player hits the second frame button 42 at a timing deviating from the suggestion timing st1 to the suggestion timing st5, the timing at which the distribution movable valve 409 is in the protruding position and the holding of the game ball are released. The timing does not match. In addition, when the second frame button 21 is operated while viewing the sorting movable valve 409 regardless of the movable pattern suggestion effect, the sorting movable valve 409 operates at a high speed and the visibility of the sorting movable valve 409 is high. It is difficult to release the holding of the game ball at the timing when the distribution movable valve 409 changes from the retracted position to the protruding position because it is low. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 47, most of the game balls discharged from the sorting device 400 do not get on the sorting movable valve 409, and therefore do not enter the general winning opening 31b, but enter the out port 36. Flow down toward

  As described above, even if the player normally holds the game ball in the holding device 400, it is difficult for the player to enter the game ball held in the holding device 400 into the general winning opening 31b. If the game ball is held at 400, the game ball held in the holding device 400 is moved to the general winning opening 31b by successfully operating the second frame button 21 in accordance with the suggestion timings st1 to st5 in the movable pattern suggestion effect. Can enter the ball.

  As a result, when the maximum number of game balls is held in the holding device 400 during the big hit state, the game balls can be obtained for the number of holds in the general winning opening 31b that cannot be normally won. The player feels merit that the maximum number of game balls is held in the holding device 400. Even if the game ball is held in the holding device 400, it is usually difficult for the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 to win the general winning opening 31b. If operated at an appropriate timing, it becomes easy for the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 to win the general winning opening 31b, and the player also feels merit in participating in the movable pattern suggestion effect. Also, since the winning ball from the general winning opening 31b is different depending on how well the second frame button 42 is operated, it is possible to give technical intervention to winning in the general winning opening 31b in the big win state. As a result, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 including the holding device 400 that is rich in interest.

  The first start ports 33a and 33b correspond to the start ball entry means of the present invention, the variable winning device 32 corresponds to the variable ball entry means of the present invention, and the ball entry detection switches 31c and 31d are the entrance balls according to the present invention. It corresponds to a sphere detection means. The lottery section described above (the function of executing step S704 of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261) corresponds to the lottery means of the present invention. The above-described holding device 400 corresponds to the holding device of the present invention, the above-described general winning port 31b corresponds to the winning port of the present invention, and the above-described second frame button 21 corresponds to the operating means of the present invention. The retracted position and the protruding position described above correspond to the first position and the second position of the present invention, and the above-described distribution movable valve 409 corresponds to the distribution member of the present invention. The above-described distribution operation control unit (function of executing steps S112 and S118 of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261) corresponds to the distribution operation control means of the present invention. The above-described first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 correspond to the operation request of the present invention, and the above-described third symbol display device 42 corresponds to the display means of the present invention. The above-described movable pattern suggestion effect corresponds to the operation effect of the present invention, and the above-described operation effect control unit (the function of executing steps S1701 to S1713 of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262) serves as the operation effect control means of the present invention. Equivalent to.

  The above-described display effect control unit (the function of executing step S1604 of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262) corresponds to the display effect control means of the present invention. The decorative board 413 mentioned above is corresponded to the member which reduces the visual recognition ease of the distribution member of this invention. The movable decorative piece 415 described above corresponds to a member on which a member that reduces the visibility of the sorting member of the present invention operates. The above-mentioned holding area light emitting unit 417 corresponds to the light emitting means of the present invention.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the game board 30 having the game area 30a in which the game ball can flow down, and the first start in which the game ball flowing down the game area 30a can enter. The mouths 33a and 33b are provided at positions where game balls flowing down the game area 30a can enter when the right-handed game is performed, and the game balls are more difficult to enter than the closed state. A variable winning device 32 that changes to an open state that makes it easy to enter a ball, a ball detection switch 31c, 31d that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 33a, 33b, and a ball detection switch 31c, 31d. A lottery unit (a function of executing step S704 of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261) that performs a lottery that can determine whether or not to cause a special gaming state based on the detection of the game ball is provided, and the lottery result is a jackpot result When When Tsu, as jackpot state variable winning device 32 is executed several times a jackpot round game that changes to the open state and a closed state. A holding device 400 that changes into a holding state in which a part of the game balls that are launched toward the variable winning device 32 can be held and a released state in which the holding of the game ball is released, and a game area 30a And the holding device 400 is provided with a general winning opening 31b that is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter if the game ball is not released from the holding device 400, and a predetermined game value is obtained based on the game ball entering, The second frame button 21 that receives the player's operation including the operation to change from the hold state to the release state, the first position that makes it difficult to win the game ball released from the hold in the general winning opening 31b, and the hold is released. A distribution movable valve 409 that performs a distribution operation that changes to a second position that facilitates winning of the played game ball in the general winning opening 31b, and a distribution operation control that controls the distribution operation of the distribution movable valve 409 Part (C of the main controller 261 U501 has the function of executing steps S112 and S118) and the display of the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 requesting the operation of the second frame button 21. Action pattern suggestion effects that match suggested timings st1 to st5, stst6 to st10 at which operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed with movable timings t2 to t6 and t8 to t12 at which the movable movable valve 409 comes to the projecting position are in a big hit state An operation effect control unit (a function of executing steps S1701 to S1713 included in the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262) that controls the display on the third symbol display device 42.

  Thereby, the player can display the timings st1 to st5 and stst6 to st10 at which the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed in the movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the big hit state. By operating the second frame button 21 at the same time, the holding device 400 can be changed from the holding state to the released state in accordance with the timings t2 to t6 and tst8 to t12 at which the sorting movable valve 409 is in the protruding position. it can. Thereby, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 at the timing when the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed wins the general winning opening 31b through the distribution movable valve 409 at the protruding position. It becomes easy to do. On the other hand, even if the second frame button 21 receives a player's operation other than this timing, the timing at which the holding device 400 changes from the holding state to the released state does not match the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 at this timing to win the general winning opening 31b. Therefore, the player positively launches the game ball during the jackpot state, actively participates in the movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the jackpot state, If the second frame button 21 can be operated well in accordance with the timing at which the operation request image is displayed, in addition to the game value that can be enjoyed by the player based on entering the variable winning device 32 during the jackpot state, As many game balls as the number of game balls held in the device 400 are entered into the general winning opening 31b, and a predetermined game value corresponding to the number can be obtained during the jackpot state. As a result, it is possible to increase the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device 400 and improve the interest of the game using the holding device 400.

  In addition, the holding device 400 can hold some of the game balls that are launched toward the variable winning device 32 in the big hit state. As a result, the player can hold some of the launched game balls in the holding device 400 by continuing to fire the game balls toward the big prize opening 32a during the big hit state. In order to allow the game ball held in the holding device 400 to be awarded to a prize opening other than the big prize opening 32a, the second frame button is well adapted to the timing at which the operation request image is displayed during the movable pattern suggestion effect. 21 need to be operated, it is possible to give technical intervention to winning in the general winning opening 31b other than the variable winning device 32 in the jackpot state.

  Note that the right-handed game is an operation of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right upper narrow area 30a2 and the lower right game machine area 302c in the game area 30a as viewed from the front. That is.

  Further, the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 as a part of a predetermined jackpot effect selected from a plurality of patterns of jackpot effects displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the big hit state. The As a result, the player has a chance to obtain a predetermined game value during the jackpot effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the jackpot state (as a movable pattern suggestion effect). It is possible to improve interest in

  In addition, the operation effect control unit displays the movable pattern suggestion effect on the third symbol display device 42 based on the fact that 90 seconds have elapsed from the start of the big hit state, so that the game ball is sufficiently stored in the holding device 400 (5 Sphere) A player can be allowed to participate in the movable pattern suggestion effect in the on-hold state, and the fun of the game using the holding device 400 can be improved.

  In addition, the timing at which the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position is a plurality of times during one movable pattern suggestion effect, and the first to fifth operations are performed in accordance with the timing at which the plurality of distribution movable valves 409 come to the protruding position. Since the movable pattern suggestion effect in which the request images 431 to 435 are displayed a plurality of times is displayed on the third symbol display device 42, the player matches the timing at which the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed. It is necessary to operate the second frame button 21. Thereby, a player can be made to participate actively in the operation effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 42. FIG.

  The jackpot effect and the movable pattern suggestion effect are effects accompanied by the reproduction of the music A or the music B, and some timings t2 to t6 of the timings t1 to t12 at which the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position. tst8 to t12 match the rhythm of the predetermined part (timing st1 to st5, stst6 to st10) of the music A or the music B, and the movable pattern suggesting effect is the first to the first according to the rhythm of the music A or the music B. Five operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed. Thereby, while making the player enjoy the act of operating the second frame button 21 in accordance with the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 displayed in accordance with the rhythm of the music A or the music B, the third symbol A player can be actively involved in the movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the display device 42.

  In addition, the distribution movable valve 409 repeats the distribution operation at a constant movable cycle, but the second frame button 21 is operated by the player at the timing when the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed. In order to match the timing at which the game ball, which is released from being held by the holding device 400, reaches the sorting movable valve 409 and the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position, Since it is displayed on the 3 symbol display device 42, if the player operates the second frame button 21 at the timing (timing st1 to st5, stst6 to st10) when the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed. The movable pattern in which the timing at which the game ball to be released from being held by the holding device 400 reaches the sorting movable valve 409 and the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position is matched. The suggested performance can be realized.

  The game ball discharged from the holding device 400 by the release of the hold from the timing at which the holding device 400 is released from the timing at which the holding device 400 is released reaches the distribution movable valve 409 rather than the timing at which the distribution movable valve 409 is in the protruding position. Since the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed before the time until the timing to perform (for example, 0.35 seconds), the player is at the timing at which the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed. Although the second frame button 21 is operated, the timing at which the game ball released from being held by the holding device 400 reaches the sorting movable valve 409 does not match the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position. The inconvenience can be avoided.

  The operation effect control unit adjusts the start timing of the jackpot effect in the jackpot state. That is, the start timing of the jackpot effect is determined according to the timing of starting condition establishment based on the entrance detection at the first start ports 33a and 33b, but (if there is a variable display hold, it is held first. However, since the distribution movable valve 409 repeats the distribution operation at a fixed movement cycle, the jackpot effect is simply determined according to the timing when the start condition is established. When the second frame button 21 receives the player's operation at the timing when the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed, the game ball released from the hold device 400 is shaken. The timing at which the minute movable valve 409 is reached may not match the timing at which the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position. Therefore, by adjusting the start timing of the jackpot effect in the jackpot state so that both timings match, the inconvenience that both timings do not match can be avoided.

  Further, since the sorting movable valve 409 is performed in such a manner that the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize, even if the second frame button 21 is operated while viewing the sorting movable valve 409, the sorting movable valve 409 is operated. It becomes difficult to release the hold of the game ball at the timing when the position changes from the retracted position to the protruding position.

  Further, the mode in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is that the sorting movable valve 409 operates at a high speed (for example, the time from the retracted position to the retracted position through the protruding position is about 0.5 seconds). Since it is an aspect, even a player who is accustomed to the operation speed of the other operation members becomes difficult to release the hold of the game ball at the timing when the sorting movable valve 409 changes from the retracted position to the protruding position.

  Further, the mode in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is that the sorting movable valve 409 is visually recognized from the front side in the gaming machine front view with respect to the holding device 400 and from the front side in the gaming machine front view. This is a mode in which a decorative plate 413 that reduces the ease is disposed. This makes it difficult to see whether the sorting movable valve 409 located behind the decorative plate 413 is in the retracted position or the protruding position, so the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 is in the protruding position and the holding of the game ball are released. It becomes difficult to match the timing to do.

  In addition, the mode in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is a mode in which the movable decorative piece 415 that impairs the visibility is operated, and thus the sorting movable valve 409 located behind the movable decorative piece 415. Since it is difficult to visually recognize whether the position is the retracted position or the protruding position, it is difficult to match the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 is at the protruding position with the timing at which the game ball is released.

  In addition, the mode in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is provided with a holding area light emitting unit 417 that emits light from the back side of the sorting movable valve 409 on the back side of the holding device 400 in front view of the gaming machine, This is a mode in which the reserved area light emitting unit 417 emits light. Accordingly, it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether the position of the sorting movable valve 409 is in the retracted position or the protruding position by the light emitted from the holding area light emitting unit 417 from the back side of the sorting movable valve 409. It becomes difficult to match the timing at the position with the timing at which the holding of the game ball is released.

  In the first embodiment, an effect suggesting the movable timing of the sorting movable valve 409 is performed during the big hit state, but as described in the second embodiment, an effect suggesting the movable timing of the sorting movable valve 409 is The game may be performed during a game state other than the jackpot state.

  All the game balls held in the holding device 400 can be discharged by the movable pattern suggestion effect during the jackpot state described in the first embodiment, but the game is again played by the holding device 400 during the jackpot state after the end of the movable pattern suggestion effect. A ball may be put on hold. Further, in the first embodiment, the movable pattern suggestion effect is not executed in the big hit state other than 16 rounds, but the game ball may be held in the holding device 400 even in the big hit state of the number of rounds where the movable pattern suggested effect is not executed. is there. In addition, when winning the time and jackpot or the probable change jackpot, the right-handed game is played even during the time-short state or the probability change state, and therefore, it may be held by the holding device 400.

  In other words, the holding device 400 is not limited to a big hit state, but also a right-handed game such as a big hit state after the end of the movable pattern suggestion effect, a big hit state other than 16 rounds, a probable change state, or a short-time state. There is a case where a game ball is put on hold during a state (right-handed game state). Therefore, in this embodiment, when a right-handed gaming state is switched to a state in which a left-handed game such as a normal gaming state is performed (left-handed gaming state), a movable pattern suggestion effect is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

  Differences between the holding device 400 of the present embodiment and the holding device 400 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the holding device 400 of the present embodiment is provided with a micro switch 418 that detects whether or not a game ball is held in the holding unit 403. Specifically, the main body of the micro switch 418 is disposed on the back side of the game board 30 and downstream of the holding unit 403, and the holding ball contact unit 418 a that contacts the game ball is provided on the back side of the game board 30. It protrudes from the side to the front side. The holding ball contact portion 418a has a convex piece at a position where the holding ball contact portion 418a comes into contact with the game ball initially held by the holding portion 403 in a state where the game ball is not held. In the state shown in FIG. 56, it is detected that the holding ball contact portion 418a is pushed by the game ball that is initially held, and that the game ball is held in the holding unit 403. In the state shown in FIG. 57, since the holding ball contact portion 418a is not pushed by the game ball, it is detected that there is no holding of the game ball in the holding portion 403. By comprising in this way, the discomfort given to a player can be reduced by displaying a movable pattern suggestion effect in the state in which the game ball is not hold | maintained at the holding | maintenance part 403.

  The means for detecting whether or not the game ball of the holding unit 403 is held is not limited to the micro switch 418, and the holding unit 403 may be sandwiched between a pair of photosensors having a projector and a light receiver. Absent.

  The timing for switching from the right-handed gaming state to the left-handed gaming state will be described. In the present embodiment, only the execution condition of the movable pattern suggestion effect is different from that in the first embodiment, and the external and internal configurations of the gaming machine are the same as those in the first embodiment. Therefore, in the following description, FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 described above are referred to as appropriate.

(Switching timing example 1)
An example of the switching timing is the time when the normal gaming state is started after the end of the jackpot state in the case of winning the normal jackpot. That is, during the big hit state, a right-handed game is performed aiming at the variable winning device 32, so that a game ball may be held in the holding device 400. Therefore, in the normal gaming state where a left-handed game is performed after the big hit state is finished, a movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. As a result, there is a possibility that the player will obtain a predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls held during the jackpot state during the normal game state after the jackpot state ends.

  In addition, when the normal gaming state is started after the jackpot state ends, the player is not likely to win the jackpot state again in order to secure the gaming value acquired during the jackpot state, It is easy to lose the willingness to continue playing. However, a movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal game state after the end of the jackpot state, and according to the number of game balls held in the holding device 400 by the movable pattern suggestion effect. Knowing that there is a chance to acquire a predetermined game value, it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game until the predetermined condition is satisfied even in the normal game state after the end of the jackpot state. .

(Switching timing example 2)
Another example of the switching timing is if the winning jackpot or short-time jackpot is won, the next gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) starts after the probability-changing state or short-time state after the jackpot state ends It is time to be done. That is, a right-handed game is played during the jackpot state, but a right-handed game is performed while aiming at the first start port 33b even during the probability change state and the short-time state after the jackpot state ends, so the game ball is placed in the holding device 400. May be put on hold. For example, when 2R jackpot with probability change is won, it is difficult to hold the game ball up to the upper limit number in the holding device 400 during the two-round jackpot state, but if the subsequent probability change state is, for example, 100 fluctuation displays, the probability change During the state, up to the upper limit number of game balls can be held in the holding device 400. Therefore, in the normal game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the probability variation state or the time-short state is ended, the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. As a result, the player can obtain a predetermined game value according to the number of game balls held during the promiscuous state or the short time state as well as during the jackpot state, the normal gaming state after the end of the probable state or the short time state. The possibility to get inside comes out. In addition, even in the normal game state after the end of the probability change state or the short-time state, it is possible to cause the player to continue playing the game until the predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Switch timing example 3)
The above-described example (example 2) is not limited to the time when the probability change state or the short-time state is switched to the normal game state, but is switched from the probability change state or the time-short state which is highly advantageous to the player to the probability change state or the time-short state where the advantage is low. It may be a point in time. For example, the probability of winning the second symbol lottery based on the detection of entering the first start port 33b during the probability change state or the short time state is set to a high probability (as a result, the opening time of the first start port 33b) If there is a period with support and a period without support, it is the time when the state with support is switched to the probability change state or time reduction state with no support from the probability change state or time reduction state with support. . A right-handed game is played during the probabilistic state and the short-time state of the support period. When a probability change state or a short time state is started during a period in which support is not provided, it is difficult to expect a ball entering the first start port 33b. Therefore, the left-handed game is aimed at the first start port 33a in the probability change state. Done. In this manner, after the end of the probability change state or the time reduction state of the support period, the movable pattern suggesting effect may be displayed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition during the probability change state or the time reduction state of the period where the support is not provided. . In addition, even if the support is not provided after the probability change state or the short-time state of the support period ends, it is possible to cause a willingness to continue the game until the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Next, a description will be given of a predetermined condition in which the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed in the left-handed gaming state switched from the right-handed gaming state.

  The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has a function of selecting a predetermined variable display effect from a plurality of patterns of variable display effects that change symbols based on the lottery result of the first symbol in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 (variation A display effect selection unit). The variable display effect selection unit executes the movable pattern suggestion effect during the variable display effect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition regarding the variable display effect in the left-handed game state after the end of the right-handed game state.

(Condition example 1 in which a movable pattern suggestion effect is executed)
An example of the predetermined reach effect in which the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed is that the variable display effect includes the predetermined reach effect and the display time of the reach effect is at least longer than the display time of the movable pattern suggestion effect. Thereby, the time which performs a movable pattern suggestion effect is securable.

(Condition example 2 in which a movable pattern suggestion effect is executed)
Another example of the predetermined reach effect in which the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed is a super reach effect that has a higher expectation level that suggests that the hit state is greater than the normal reach effect. In the super reach effect, the display time of the reach effect is set to a time (60 seconds) longer than the time (15 seconds) in which the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed. In addition, if the display time of the reach production is long, the player tends to feel bored in the middle of the reach production, but the display time of the reach production is executed by executing the movable pattern suggestion production in the middle of the reach production. Can be entertained.

(Condition example 3 in which a movable pattern suggestion effect is executed)
Another example of the predetermined reach effect in which the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed is that in the left-handed game state after the end of the right-handed game state, the lottery result of the first symbol in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is a right-handed game. This is a case where the result is a non-stated result, and the variable display effect selected based on the lottery result of the first symbol performed after the result is a super reach effect. In this case, the right-handed gaming state is not achieved by giving an opportunity to win the game ball held during the previous right-handed gaming state to the general winning opening 31b during the super reach production performed after the result of the losing. It is possible to reduce the feeling of disappointment that the result is an outlier.

(Condition example 4 in which a movable pattern suggestion effect is executed)
In the example 4 described above, the variable display effect based on the lottery result (outcome result) of the first symbol may include a reach effect that has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach, such as a super reach effect. Thereby, it is possible to reduce a feeling of disappointment that the result is a disapproval result that does not result in a right-handed gaming state in spite of execution of a variable display effect including a super reach effect.

  Next, when the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed as a part of the variable display effect (for example, a part of the reach effect), the suggestion timing and the distribution movable valve 409 in the movable pattern suggestion effect are the same as in the first embodiment. In some cases, the timing of the movement may not match. Therefore, in the following, means for setting the variable display effect including the movable pattern suggestion effect in the present embodiment will be described, and then the suggestion timing and the movable movable valve 409 in the movable pattern suggestion effect in the present embodiment will be described. A means for matching the movable timing will be described.

  The movable pattern suggestion effect executed during the reach effect performed by the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the variable display mode setting process by the sub-control device 262. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the music start timing adjustment process during the reach effect by the sub-control device 262. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing processing during reach effect by the sub-control device 262.

  (Variation display mode setting process)

  As shown in FIG. 48, in step S1801, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S1802 if a variation pattern designation command has been received, and proceeds to step S1804 if not received.

  In step S1802, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a music start timing adjustment process, and proceeds to step S1803. In step S1803, a display command for displaying a reach effect image at the start timing adjusted in step S1802 is set, and the process ends. If the variable display effect does not include the reach effect or if there is no adjustment in step S1802, a display command for executing the corresponding variable display effect is set.

  In step S1804, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S1805 if a decoration symbol designation command is received, and proceeds to step S1806 if not received. In step S1805, a stop display command based on a stop symbol is set, and this process ends. In step S1806, a reach effect in-process described later is performed.

(Music start timing adjustment process during reach production)
In this embodiment, during the first super reach production after switching from the right-handed gaming state to the left-handed gaming state, the reach first half production displayed in the first half of the reach production period and the movable displayed in the middle of the reach production period. The pattern suggestion effect and the reach second half effect displayed in the second half of the reach effect period are continuously displayed. When it is necessary to match the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect and the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409, the adjustment effect described below is displayed before the first half reach effect is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 49, in step S1900A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the right-handed gaming state has been switched to the left-handed gaming state. Specifically, in the switching timing example 1 described above, when the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives an ending command notifying the end of the big hit state, it is determined that the right-handed gaming state has been switched to the left-handed gaming state. In the switching timing example 2 described above, after the probability variation state ends, the stop symbol time is determined when the jackpot determination table returns from the probability variation state jackpot determination table to the normal state jackpot determination table, or after the time reduction state ends. It is determined that the right-handed gaming state has been switched to the left-handed gaming state at the time when the table for use returns from the time-saving state stopping symbol time determination table to the non-time-saving state stopping symbol time determination table. In the switching timing example 3 described above, when the hit determination table for the second symbol lottery returns from the high probability state to the normal probability, it is determined that the right-handed gaming state has been switched to the left-handed gaming state.

  In step S1900B, CPU 551 of sub control device 262 determines whether or not a game ball is held in holding unit 403 of holding device 400. Specifically, if it is detected by the micro switch 418 that the game ball is on hold, the process proceeds to step S1901, and if it is detected by the micro switch 418 that there is no game ball on hold, this process ends. This

In step S1901, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 analyzes the content of the variation pattern designation command and determines whether or not the reach effect is a super reach effect when the reach display effect is included in the change display effect. . If the reach effect is a super reach, the process proceeds to step S1902, and if the reach effect is not a super reach, the music start timing adjustment process is not performed and the process is terminated.

  The reason why the music start timing adjustment processing is not performed when not super-reach is that when it is normal reach, sufficient time may not be secured to execute the start of the movable pattern suggestion effect. It should be noted that even a reach effect other than super reach may be such a reach effect as long as it is a reach effect that can secure a sufficient time for executing the start of the movable pattern suggestion effect.

  In step S1902, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 acquires the time (delay time) from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 to the reception time of the variation pattern designation command, and stores it in the RAM 553. Store in area v. This is because the time when the sub control device 262 receives the variation pattern designation command can be regarded as the time when the variation display effect is started. In step S1903, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 analyzes the received variation pattern designation command, and stores the time from the variation start to the reach effect start in the storage area w of the RAM 553.

  In step S1904, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 stores the total time obtained by adding the delay time stored in the storage area v and the time from the start of change stored in the storage area w to the start of reach production in the RAM 553. Store in area x. The total time stored in the storage area x corresponds to the time from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 to the start of reach production.

  In step S1905, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x is greater than 15 seconds corresponding to a half cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409, and 15 seconds If greater than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1906, and if the total time is less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1914.

  In step S1906, it is determined whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x coincides with 30 seconds corresponding to one cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409. If the total time is equal to 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1907, and if it is not equal to 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1908.

  In step S1907, the first stage reach that is scheduled from the beginning is displayed without performing the adjustment stage. Then, as originally scheduled, after 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the reach production, the rust portion of the music piece A is started. Simultaneously with the start of the chorus part of the music piece A, the movable pattern suggestion effect is started. In the movable pattern suggestion effect performed during the reach effect, only the portion including the suggestion timing corresponding to the movable pattern in the music A or the music B used in the first embodiment flows. For example, the portion including the suggestion timing in the music A or the music B is applied to the chorus portion of the music A or the chorus portion of the music B.

  In step S1908, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S1909 if the total time stored in the storage area x is greater than 15 seconds and smaller than 30 seconds, and otherwise proceeds to step S1911.

  In step S1909, a time obtained by reducing the total time stored in the storage area x from 30 seconds corresponding to one period of the movable period of the sorting movable valve 409 is stored in the storage area y. In step S1910, after performing the adjustment effect for the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the reach effect, the first half reach effect is displayed. Then, after a lapse of the total time of the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the reach effect and 30 seconds from the start of the reach first half effect, the rust portion of the music piece A is started. Simultaneously with the start of the chorus part of the music piece A, the movable pattern suggestion effect is started.

In step S1911, if the total time stored in the storage area x is greater than 30 seconds corresponding to one cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409, the process proceeds to step S1912. In step S1912, the following calculation is performed and stored in the storage area y.
y = 15 seconds- (total time stored in storage area x-30 seconds)
15 seconds is a time corresponding to a half cycle of the movable cycle, and 30 seconds is a time corresponding to one cycle of the movable cycle.

  In step S1913, the reach first half effect is displayed after performing the adjustment effect for the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the reach effect. Then, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts the image and sound of the climax part of the music B after the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the reach effect and 30 seconds from the start of the reach first half effect. Simultaneously with the start of the chorus part of the music B, the movable pattern suggestion effect is started.

  In step S1914, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x is equal to 15 seconds corresponding to a half cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409. If the total time is equal to 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1915, and if the total time is shorter than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1916.

  In step S1915, the adjustment effect is not performed, and the reach effect image scheduled from the beginning is displayed. That is, the rust portion of the music B is started after 30 seconds from the start of the reach production as originally scheduled. In step S1916, a time obtained by reducing the total time stored in the storage area x from 15 seconds corresponding to a half period of the movable period of the sorting movable valve 409 is stored in the storage area y. In step S1917, after performing the adjustment effect for the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the reach effect, the first half effect of the reach is displayed. Then, after the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the reach effect and 30 seconds after the start of the reach first half effect, the chorus part of the music B is started. Simultaneously with the start of the chorus part of the music B, the movable pattern suggestion effect is started.

  When the time required for the adjustment effect is determined, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 selects the reach second half effect that is executed after the end of the movable pattern suggestion effect and sets it to be displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The longer the adjustment production time, the shorter the reach second half production is selected.

(Processing during reach production)
Next, the process during reach production will be described. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes the movable pattern suggestion effect according to the present invention in the reach effect processing shown in FIG.

  In step S1951, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 displays the reach symbol on the third symbol display device. When the adjustment effect is not performed, the reach pattern is displayed from the first half of the reach effect. When the adjustment effect is performed, the reach symbol is displayed from the adjustment effect.

  In step S1952, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a movable pattern suggestion effect process executed during the movable pattern suggestion effect. In the movable pattern suggestion effect process, for example, when the second frame button 21 is operated in accordance with the suggestion timing during the movable pattern suggestion effect, if the timing is correct, an image indicating that the timing is correct is displayed. Display or output correct sound. If the timing is not correct, an image indicating that the timing is not correct is displayed or an incorrect sound is output.

  In this way, when the variable display effect cannot be started from the start timing of the movable cycle (r = 30 seconds) or the half cycle timing of the movable movable valve 409 (r = 15 seconds), the original music A or After the time stored in the storage area y has elapsed from the start time of the climax part of the music B, the climax part of the music A or the music B starts and the divide is movable by starting the rust part of the music A or the music B The start timing or the half cycle timing of the movable cycle of the valve 409 can be matched. Accordingly, it is possible to execute a movable pattern suggesting effect in which the rhythm of the chorus portion of the music A or the music B and the movable timing of the sorting movable valve 409 are matched. Hereinafter, four examples of the movable pattern suggestion effect will be described.

  Next, the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 during the reach effect and the suggested timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1 showing the relationship between the movable timing of the sorting movable valve 409 during the reach effect and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect. FIG. 52 is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggesting effect example 2 during the reach effect. FIG. 53 is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggesting effect example 3 during the reach effect. FIG. 54 is a timing chart of the movable pattern suggesting effect example 4 during the reach effect.

(Moving pattern suggestion effect example 1 performed during reach production)
As shown in FIG. 51, the sorting movable valve 409 is driven at a constant cycle configured by the same fixed pattern as in the first embodiment. Here, it is assumed that the big hit state is finished with three game balls left in the holding device 400, and then the normal game state is resumed. During the jackpot state, it is assumed that the game ball easily enters the first start port 33b, so that the number of variable display holds is four at the end of the jackpot. It is assumed that after the jackpot ends, the next variable display is started, and the result of the lottery is a result of being out of super reach.

  After the result is displayed, the next variable display based on the hold is started, and this variable pattern command is a super reach effect (the lottery result may be winning or losing), and the change time from the start to the end of the change is 65 seconds. Yes, the reach effect is started 5 seconds after the start of the change, and the reach effect ends (the change display ends) 60 seconds after the start of the reach effect.

  At this time, the change display based on the next hold is started at the same timing as the movable timing t10, and after 5 seconds, the reach effect is started slightly later than the movable timing t11. The movable pattern suggesting effect is scheduled to start 30 seconds after the start of the reach effect, but the timing 30 seconds after the start of the reach effect is a timing slightly delayed from the movable timing t11. The timing is on the way. In this case, if the chorus part of the music B is started from the same timing as the movable timing t10, the suggestion timing included in the chorus part of the music B and the movable timing in each movable pattern do not coincide with each other. An adjustment effect for delaying the start timing of the climax part of music A or music B is displayed so that the start timing of the rust part of A or music B matches the start timing of the movable pattern.

  Adjustment of the start timing of the climax part of music A or music B is the time (hereinafter referred to as delay time) from the time 30 seconds of the movable cycle to the time of reception of the variation pattern designation command from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle. Call) v and time y (hereinafter referred to as adjustment time y) obtained by subtracting the total time x from the start of fluctuation to the start of reach production (hereinafter referred to as pre-reach time) w, song A or song B It is to delay the start timing of the rust portion. Specifically, after performing the adjustment effect for 3 seconds (y time) obtained by subtracting 27 seconds (total time x) from 30 seconds of the movable cycle, the rust portion of the music piece A in accordance with the start timing of the movable pattern A To start.

  The adjustment effect may be a reach effect after the adjustment time y and a series of reach effects as part of the reach effect.

  As described above, when the reach effect is in the middle of the movable cycle, that is, in the middle of the movable pattern B, the adjustment effect is actually performed by delaying the start timing of the rust portion of the music piece A by the adjustment time y. The timing at which the rust portion of the music piece A is started coincides with the start timing of the movable pattern A. Thereby, in the movable pattern suggestion effect, the movable timing constituting the movable pattern A coincides with the suggested timing at which the operation request image suggesting the movable timing is displayed.

  With the start of the chorus part of the music A, the movable pattern suggestion effect is started. In this state, three game balls are held in the holding device 400. The movable timings t2 to t6 constituting the movable pattern A coincide with the suggestion timings st1 to st5 at which the operation request images are displayed. As a result, the player operates the second frame button 21 at least three times out of the suggestion timings st1 to st5 in accordance with the suggestion timing, so that the three game balls remaining in the holding device 400 are generally awarded. It can be made to enter the mouth 31b. As a result, a maximum of 45 award balls can be obtained during reach production after the end of the big hit state.

  12 seconds remain from the end timing of the movable pattern suggesting effect example 1 to the end timing of the reach effect (variable display effect). In the reach second half effect, an image for 12 seconds is selected, and the image is displayed on the second symbol display device 42.

(Moving pattern suggestion effect example 2 performed during reach production)
Next, as shown in FIG. 52, it is assumed that the start of the variable display is 3 seconds after the timing t10, that is, 25 seconds after the start of the movable period, and the reach effect is started 5 seconds after the start of the variable display. Then, in this case, if the rust portion (movable pattern suggestion effect) of the music A is started 30 seconds after the start of the reach effect, the movable pattern A can be performed without performing an adjustment effect that delays the start timing of the rust portion of the music A. The movable timing from t2 to t6 that constitutes and the suggested timing from st2 to st6 coincide.

  15 seconds remain from the end timing of the movable pattern suggesting effect example 2 to the end timing of the reach effect (variable display effect). In the reach second half effect, an image for 15 seconds is selected, and the image is displayed on the second symbol display device 42.

(Moving pattern suggestion effect example 3 performed during reach production)
Next, as shown in FIG. 53, it is assumed that the start of the variable display is the movable timing t2, that is, four seconds after the start of the movable cycle, and the reach effect is started five seconds after the start of the variable display. Then, if the rust portion (movable pattern suggestion effect) of the music A is started 30 seconds after the start of the reach effect, the movable timings of t2 to t6 constituting the movable pattern A coincide with the suggested timings of st2 to st6. do not do.

  Therefore, an adjustment time y (6 seconds) obtained by subtracting the total time x (9 seconds) of the delay time v (4 seconds) and the pre-reach time w (5 seconds) from the time 15 seconds corresponding to a half cycle of the movable cycle. The adjustment effect for delaying the start timing of the chorus part of the music B is displayed. In this way, by performing the adjustment effect for 6 seconds, the timing at which the climax part of the music B is actually started is the half cycle of the movable cycle, that is, the start timing of the movable pattern B, 36 seconds after the disclosure of the reach effect. Match. Thus, at the start of the movable pattern suggestion effect, the movable timings t8 to t12 constituting the movable pattern B coincide with the suggestion timings st6 to st10.

  9 seconds remain from the end timing of the movable pattern suggesting effect example 3 to the end timing of the reach effect (variable display effect). In the reach second half effect, an image for 9 seconds is selected, and the image is displayed on the second symbol display device 42.

(Moving pattern suggestion effect example 4 performed during reach production)
Next, as shown in FIG. 54, it is assumed that the start of the diagram variation display is the movable timing t4, that is, 10 seconds after the start of the movable cycle, and the reach effect is started 5 seconds after the start of the variation display. Then, in this case, if the rust portion (movable pattern suggestion effect) of the music B is started 30 seconds after the start of the reach effect, the movable pattern B can be performed without performing an adjustment effect that delays the start timing of the rust portion of the music B. The movable timings t8 to t12 and the suggestion timings st6 to st10 coincide with each other.

  15 seconds remain from the end timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect example 4 to the end timing of the reach effect (variable display effect). In the reach second half effect, an image for 15 seconds is selected, and the image is displayed on the second symbol display device 42.

  Next, the movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the reach effect will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (a) and 55 (b) are diagrams showing the movable pattern suggesting effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the reach effect. FIGS. 55A and 55B correspond to FIGS. 37C and 37D of the movable pattern suggesting effect of the first embodiment.

  The third symbol display device 42 is the same as the movable pattern suggesting effect of the first embodiment except that a reach symbol image 427 indicating that a reach effect is being displayed is displayed (FIG. 36 (a) to FIG. 36). 39 (p)). The reach symbol image 427 is an image showing a reach where two symbols “7” and “7” are aligned, for example. Further, as in the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 displays an operation explanation image 423, an operation timing image 425, and a first operation request image 431. When the player presses the second frame button 42 at the timing at which the operation timing image 425 and the first operation request image 431 completely overlap, as in the first embodiment, the player presses the second frame button 42, The movable timing of the sorting movable valve 409 coincides. Similarly, from the second operation request image 432 to the fifth operation request image (not shown), the second frame button 42 is operated at a timing at which the operation timing image 425 and the operation request image completely overlap.

  Next, the lower right game area 302c of the game board 30 in the middle of execution of the movable pattern suggestion effect during the reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the lower right game area 302c of the game board 30 in a state where game balls are held. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing the lower right game area 302c of the game board 30 in a state where no game ball is held.

  As shown in FIG. 57, a plurality of gaming balls may remain in the holding device 400 after the right-handed gaming state has ended. In the movable pattern suggestion effect performed during the reach effect in the left-handed game state after the right-handed game state ends, the player can select the second frame button 21 in accordance with the suggestion timing displayed together with the rust portion of the music A or the music B. If the player can successfully hit the game ball, as shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 referred to in the first embodiment, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 is placed on the sorting movable valve 409 and awarded to the general winning opening 30b. Can do. In other words, if the game ball remains in the holding device 400 after the right-handed gaming state is finished, the player is positive in the movable pattern suggesting effect in the predetermined reach production in the left-handed gaming state after the right-handed gaming state is finished. By participating, it is possible to obtain a prize ball acquisition opportunity according to the number of game balls left in the holding device 400.

  Therefore, there is a possibility that a predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls held during the right-handed gaming state will be obtained during the left-handed gaming state after the right-handed gaming state ends. As a result, it is possible to increase the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device 400 during the right-handed gaming state, and improve the interest of the game using the holding device 400. Further, when a predetermined reach effect is displayed in the left-handed game state after the end of the right-handed game state, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed, and the number of game balls held in the holding device 400 by the movable pattern suggestion effect For a player who knows that there is a chance to acquire a predetermined game value according to the game, the player tries to continue the game until the predetermined reach production is established in the left-handed game state after the right-handed game state is completed. Can motivate the game to continue.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 57, when the game ball is not held in the holding device 400 after the right-handed gaming state ends, a predetermined reach effect is displayed in the left-handed gaming state after the right-handed gaming state ends. Even in the case of the moving pattern suggestion effect, it is not executed. Thereby, the discomfort given to the player can be reduced by displaying the movable pattern suggestion effect in a state where the game ball is not held in the holding unit 403.

  If the micro switch 418 detects that there is a game ball held in the holding device 400, the third symbol display device 42 displays a display suggesting that there is a possibility that the movable pattern suggesting effect may be executed. The game may be motivated to continue the game until a predetermined reach effect is established.

  Note that the above-described variable display effect selection unit (the function of executing step S503 in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261) corresponds to the variable display effect selection means of the present invention. The first start port 33b corresponds to the second start entrance means of the present invention, and the entrance detection switch 31d corresponds to the second entrance detection means. The function of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 that performs lottery for determining whether or not to generate a big hit state based on the detection of a ball entering the first start port 33b corresponds to the second lottery means of the present invention. The passage detection switch 34a corresponds to the game ball passage detection means of the present invention. The function of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 that performs lottery per second symbol based on detection of passage to the second start port 34 corresponds to third lottery means of the present invention. The micro switch 418 corresponds to the reserved ball detecting means of the present invention.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a lottery that can determine whether a right-handed advantageous gaming state is caused or not is performed based on the detection of the game ball by the entrance detection units 31a and 31b. A lottery section is provided, and when the symbol variation display is performed in a manner corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery section, and the result of the lottery is a specific result, the right-handed advantageous gaming state is performed as a right-handed game. A gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state occurs, and after the right-handed advantageous gaming state, the game state is switched to a gaming state in which a left-handed game is performed. The operation effect control unit controls to display the movable pattern suggestion effect on the third symbol display device 42 based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the right-handed advantageous game state ends. To do. Therefore, if the player plays a right-handed game during the right-handed advantageous game state, the game ball held in the holding device 400 remains after switching from the right-handed advantageous game state to the game state in which the left-handed game is played. In addition, based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the game state in which the player makes a left-handed game, he actively participates in the movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and the first to fifth in the movable pattern suggestion effect. If the second frame button 21 can be operated successfully in accordance with the timing at which the operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed, in addition to the benefits that the player can enjoy during the right-handed advantageous gaming state, the remaining in the holding device 400 A predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls can be obtained in a game state in which a left-handed game after switching is performed. As a result, it is possible to increase the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device 400 and improve the interest of the game using the holding device 400.

  In addition, the jackpot game in which the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 32 changes between the open state and the closed state is executed multiple times is a right-handed advantageous state in which a game ball launched by right-handing enters the variable winning device 32. is there. When a right-handed game is performed aiming at the variable winning device 32, a game ball may be held in the holding device 400. If the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed in the game state in which the left-handed game is completed after the end of the jackpot game, the player may obtain a predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls to be held. Therefore, the player's merit can be enhanced by holding the game ball in the holding device 400 during the big hit state.

  Further, after the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 32 changes between the open state and the closed state, the high probability game state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery becomes a jackpot result is increased is a game that is fired by right-handed When the ball enters the first start port 33b, it is a right-handed advantageous state in which a lottery based on the detection of the incoming ball in the incoming ball detector 31b is performed with high probability. When a right-handed game is performed aiming at the first starting port 31b, a game ball may be held in the holding device 400. In the game state in which a left-handed game after the end of the high-probability gaming state is performed, a movable pattern is suggested. If the effect is displayed, the player may obtain a predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls to be held. Therefore, the player's merit can be enhanced by holding the game ball in the holding device 400 during the high probability gaming state.

  After the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 32 is changed between the open state and the closed state, the time when the symbol variation display time is shortened is a short time state. By entering the ball, it is a right-handed advantageous state in which the symbol variation display according to the result of the lottery based on the ball detection by the ball detection unit 31b is performed in a shortened time. When a right-handed game is performed aiming at the first start port 31b, a game ball may be held in the holding device 400. In a game state in which a left-handed game after the completion of the short-time state is performed, a movable pattern suggestion effect is provided. If displayed, the player may obtain a predetermined game value according to the number of game balls to be held. Therefore, the player's merit can be enhanced by holding the game ball in the holding device 400 during the time-saving state.

  Also, a game ball that is launched during a right-handed game is provided at a position where it can enter, and changes between a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. The first start opening 33b to be performed, the entrance detection switch 31b to detect the game ball entering the first start opening 33b, and the right-handed advantageous game described above based on the detection of the game ball by the entrance detection switch 31b. A second lottery unit that performs a second lottery that can determine whether or not to generate a state, a passage detection switch 34a that detects the passage of a game ball that is fired during a right-handed game, and a game ball by the passage detection switch 34a And a third lottery unit for performing a third lottery for determining whether or not to open the first start port 33b. After the jackpot game, when the result of the third lottery is a result of opening the first start port 33b, a time longer than the time for the first start port 33b to be open in another game state The support game state in which the first start port 33b is open is a game state in which the advantage cannot be obtained by left-handed, and is therefore a right-handed advantageous game state. When a right-handed game is performed aiming at the passage detection switch 34a, a game ball may be held in the holding device 400. If the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the support game state is completed, the player may obtain a predetermined game value according to the number of game balls to be held. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's merit by holding the game ball in the holding device 400 during the support game state.

  Based on the lottery result in the lottery section, a variable display effect selection unit for selecting a predetermined variable display effect from a plurality of patterns of variable display effects that change the design is provided. In a gaming state in which a game is performed, the variable display effect includes a predetermined reach effect that is performed by displaying a part of a specific combination that represents a specific result as a result of a lottery operation, and at least an operation time of the reach effect is displayed. Since the execution of the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 42 when the display time of the effect is longer, the display of the reach effect in the game state in which the left-handed game after the right-handed advantageous game state is finished is displayed. You can entertain your time.

  In addition, the degree of expectation indicating that the predetermined reach effect included in the variable display effect selected in the game state in which the left-handed game state after the right-handed advantageous game state ends becomes the right-handed advantageous game state is predetermined. Since the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 in the case of a pattern that includes a higher super reach effect than the normal reach effect that is the height, the left after the right-handed advantageous game state ends It is possible to make the player enjoy the display time of the reach effect including the specific expected effect in the gaming state where the hitting game is performed.

  In addition, in the game state in which the left-handed advantageous game state is completed and the left-handed game state is performed, the lottery result in the lottery unit is a result of losing the right-handed advantageous game state and is selected after the second specific result. Since the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 when the effect includes the above-described predetermined reach effect, the lottery performed in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the right-handed advantageous game state is ended. If the lottery result at the club is a right-handed advantageous gaming state that is not a right-off advantageous gaming state, an opportunity to win a game ball held during the previous advantageous gaming state at a winning opening is given after the predetermined result. By giving it during the reach performance, it is possible to reduce the feeling of disappointment that the result is an out-of-game result that is not in an advantageous gaming state.

The reach effect includes a pattern including an expected effect having a predetermined height indicating that the advantageous game state is to be achieved, and an expectation level indicating that the advantageous game state is to be obtained as the expected effect. Including at least a pattern including a higher specific expectation effect as a component,
The predetermined condition is a second specifying result in which the lottery result in the lottery means is not the advantageous gaming state in the gaming state in which the left-handed game is performed after the advantageous gaming state ends, and the second specifying The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined reach production leading to the result is a pattern including the specific expected production.

  The reach effect is a pattern that includes a reach effect that has a predetermined height that suggests a right-handed advantageous gaming state, and the expectation level that suggests that the right-handed advantageous gaming state is the above-mentioned Including a pattern including at least a super-reaching effect higher than the reach effect as a component, and in a gaming state in which a left-handed game is performed after the right-handed advantageous game state is finished, The movable pattern suggesting effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 in the case where the predetermined reach effect leading to the disengagement result is a pattern including the super reach effect. As a result, when the lottery result in the lottery section performed after the end of the right-handed advantageous gaming state includes a highly anticipated super reach production, it is a result that does not enter the right-handed advantageous gaming state. In spite of execution of the variable display effect including the super reach effect, by giving the opportunity to win the game ball held in the right-handed advantageous game state to the general winning opening 31b during the predetermined reach effect. It is possible to reduce the disappointment that the specific result is not in the advantageous gaming state.

  In addition, the variable display effect has a pattern that includes a normal reach effect that has a predetermined level of expectation that indicates that a special gaming state is to be achieved, and an expectation level that indicates that a special game state is expected, as compared to the expected effect. Including a pattern that includes a higher super reach effect as a component, and the movable pattern suggestion effect is a display result that the lottery result in the lottery is out of super reach, and the variable display effect that leads to the display result is super. When the pattern includes a reach effect, it is executed during a super reach effect performed after the display result. Thereby, when the lottery result in the lottery section performed after the end of the jackpot state is a display result of a super-reaching that does not become a jackpot state even though the lottery result includes a highly anticipated super-reach effect, By giving a chance to win the game ball held during the previous jackpot state to the general winning opening 31b during the variable display effect, the super reach effect is executed but the super reach is not set to the special game state. The disappointment with respect to the display result can be reduced.

  In addition, a holding ball detection unit 418 that detects a game ball held in the holding device 400 is provided, and the operation effect control unit satisfies a predetermined condition and is held in the holding device 400 by the holding ball detection unit 418. Based on the determination that there is a sphere, a movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. Thereby, although there is no game ball put on hold by the holding device 400, the discomfort given to the player by executing the movable pattern suggestion effect can be reduced.

  In the first and second embodiments, the game ball is held in the holding device 400 during the right-handed game state such as during the big hit state or the probability change state after the end of the big hit state, and the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed during the right-handed game state. However, in this embodiment, the game ball may be held in the holding device 400 during the normal game state, and the movable pattern suggestion effect may be executed during the specific variation display of the normal game state. A configuration that makes it easier for the holding device 400 to hold a game ball during the normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board in a state attached to the inner frame in the third embodiment.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, the game board 30 is configured such that the game ball flowing down the lower right game area 30a3 is easily held by the holding device 400. Specifically, a plurality of guide nails 39 are provided so that the game ball flowing down the left side of the first start port 33 b in the front view of the game board 30 can be easily guided toward the storage unit 403 of the storage device 400. Is arranged. Therefore, in Examples 1 and 2, 5 game balls were put on hold when a game ball was continuously fired for 75 seconds in a right-handed game. In this example, a game ball was fired for 60 seconds in a right-handed game. If it continues, 5 game balls are put on hold.

  As in the first and second embodiments, the sorting movable valve 409 performs a sorting operation using the movable pattern A and the movable pattern B. Further, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed using the climax portion of the music piece A or the music piece B as in the first and second embodiments. However, in this embodiment, the music A or the music B is started from the start of the reach effect. In addition, the music A or the music B is placed in the climax part 60 seconds after the music starts, that is, 60 seconds after the start of the reach effect (this timing is also a timing when the above-mentioned five game balls are put on hold). Shall reach. Therefore, in this embodiment, the start timing of the music A or the music B is matched with the start timing of the movable pattern A or the movable pattern B, so that the suggestion timing in the movable pattern suggestion effect is changed to the movable timing of the movable pattern A or the movable pattern B. Can be adapted to

  The movable pattern suggestion effect that is executed during the specific variation display in the normal gaming state by the operation effect control unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the music start timing adjustment process during the reach effect in the normal gaming state by the sub-control device 262. FIG. 60 is a table for determining the start timing of the music used for the reach effect and the music used for the reach effect. Other processes performed by the sub-control device 262 are the same as those in the second embodiment.

(Music start timing adjustment processing during reach production in normal gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 59, in step S2001, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not a game ball is held in the holding unit 403 of the holding device 400. Specifically, if it is detected by the micro switch 418 (see FIG. 57) that the game ball is held, the process proceeds to step S2002. If the micro switch 418 detects that the game ball is not held, this process is performed. finish.

  In step S2002, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 analyzes the contents of the variation pattern designation command and determines whether or not the reach effect is a super reach effect when the reach display effect is included in the change display effect. . If the reach effect is a super reach, the process proceeds to step S2003. If the reach effect is not a super reach, the music start timing adjustment process is not performed, and the process ends. In addition, even if it is reach production other than super reach, it is the same as that of Example 2 as long as it is a reach production which can ensure sufficient time for performing the start of a movable pattern suggestion production.

  In step S2003, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 acquires the time (delay time) from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 to the reception time of the variation pattern designation command, and stores it in the RAM 553. Store in area v. This is because the time when the sub control device 262 receives the variation pattern designation command can be regarded as the time when the variation display effect is started. In step S2004, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 analyzes the received variation pattern designation command, and stores the time from the variation start to the reach effect start in the storage area w of the RAM 553.

  In step S2005, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the total time obtained by adding the delay time stored in the storage area v and the time from the start of change stored in the storage area w to the start of reach production in the RAM 553. Store in area x. The total time stored in the storage area x corresponds to the time from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 to the start of reach production.

  In step S2006, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x is greater than 15 seconds corresponding to a half cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409, and 15 seconds If greater than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2007, and if the total time is less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2016.

  In step S2007, it is determined whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x matches 30 seconds corresponding to one cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409. If the total time is equal to 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2008, and if not equal to 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2010.

  In step S2008, 15 seconds corresponding to a half cycle of the movable period of the sorting movable valve 409 is stored in the storage area y as an adjustment time for performing the adjustment effect for adjusting the music start timing in the reach effect. In step S2009, after performing the adjustment effect for 15 seconds stored in the storage area y from the start of the reach effect, the music B in the super reach effect is started. The adjustment effect is a right-handed notification effect for notifying the player that a right-handed game is performed during the reach effect. The right-handed notification effect is an effect of displaying an image such as “Please aim right” on the display screen of the third symbol display device 42, for example. In addition, the movable pattern suggestion effect is started 60 seconds after the start of the music B.

  In step S2010, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S2011 if the total time stored in the storage area x is greater than 15 seconds and smaller than 30 seconds, and otherwise proceeds to step S2013.

  In step S2011, a time obtained by reducing the total time stored in the storage area x from 30 seconds corresponding to one of the movable periods of the sorting movable valve 409 is stored in the storage area y. In step S2012, after performing the right-handed notification effect as the adjustment effect for the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the reach effect, the music A in the super reach effect is started. In addition, a movable pattern suggestion effect is started 60 seconds after the start of the music piece A.

In step S2013, if the total time stored in the storage area x is larger than 30 seconds corresponding to one cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409, the process proceeds to step S2014. In step S2014, the following calculation is performed and stored in the storage area y.
y = 15 seconds- (total time stored in storage area x-30 seconds)
15 seconds is a time corresponding to a half cycle of the movable cycle, and 30 seconds is a time corresponding to one cycle of the movable cycle.

  In step S2015, after performing the right-handed notification effect as the adjustment effect for the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the reach effect, the music B in the super reach effect is started. In addition, the movable pattern suggestion effect is started 60 seconds after the start of the music B.

  In step S2016, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x is equal to 15 seconds corresponding to a half cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409. If the total time is equal to 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2017, and if the total time is shorter than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2019.

  In step S2017, 15 seconds corresponding to a half cycle of the movable period of the sorting movable valve 409 is stored in the storage area y as the adjustment time for performing the right-handed notification effect as the adjustment effect. In step S2018, after performing the adjustment effect for 15 seconds stored in the storage area y from the start of the reach effect, the music A in the super reach effect is started.

  In step S2019, a time obtained by reducing the total time stored in the storage area x from 15 seconds corresponding to a half period of the movable period of the sorting movable valve 409 is stored in the storage area y. In step S2020, after performing the right-handed notification effect as the adjustment effect for the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the reach effect, the music B in the super reach effect is started. In addition, the movable pattern suggestion effect is started 60 seconds after the start of the music B.

  The process of adjusting the start timing of the music A or the music B used for the reach effect as described above may be performed using a table stored in the ROM 551 of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 as shown in FIG. .

  In this way, even if the reach effect cannot be started in accordance with the start timing of the movable patterns A and B, the start timing of the music A or the music B is delayed by a predetermined adjustment time, so that the music A or the music B can be delayed. The start timing can be matched with the start timing of the movable pattern A or the movable pattern B, and the suggestion timing in the movable pattern suggestion effect can be matched with the movable timing of the movable pattern A or the movable pattern B. Accordingly, it is possible to execute a movable pattern suggesting effect in which the rhythm of the chorus portion of the music A or the music B and the movable timing of the sorting movable valve 409 are matched. In the following, this movable pattern suggesting effect will be described with an example.

  Next, the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 during the reach effect in the normal gaming state and the suggested timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a timing chart of a movable pattern suggestion effect example showing the relationship between the movable timing of the sorting movable valve 409 during the reach effect in the normal gaming state and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect.

(Example of moving pattern suggestion effect performed during the reach effect in the normal gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 61, the distribution movable valve 409 is driven at a constant cycle configured by the same movable pattern as in the first and second embodiments. Here, in the normal gaming state, the variable display is started, and this variable pattern command is a super reach effect (the lottery result may be winning or losing), and the reach effect time is 120 seconds.

  At this time, the above-described variation display starts at the same timing as the movable timing t10 (22 seconds after the start of the movable cycle), and after the variation display is performed for five seconds from the start of variation to the start of reach production, it is slightly less than the movable timing t11. The reach effect is started at a delayed timing (27 seconds after the start of the movable cycle). That is, the variation start delay time v is 22 seconds, the time w from the start of variation to the start of reach production is 5 seconds, and the time x obtained by adding the time v and time w is 27 seconds. The time y for performing is 3 seconds, and the music in the reach effect and the movable pattern suggestion effect is the music A (see also FIG. 60).

  Therefore, a right-handed notification effect as an adjustment effect is performed for 3 seconds from the start of the reach effect. The right-handed notification effect is displayed as a still image or a moving image, but is displayed as an image with less information than the movable pattern suggestion effect in order to reduce the amount of memory used in the adjustment effect. Music A in the reach effect is started simultaneously with the end timing of the right-handed notification effect. Since the end timing of the right-handed notification effect coincides with the start timing of the movable pattern A, the music A in the reach effect is started simultaneously with the start of the movable pattern A. Thereby, the rhythm of the chorus part of the music A 60 seconds after the start of the music A can be matched with the movable timings t2 to t6 of the movable pattern A. As a result, in the movable pattern suggestion effect, the movable timings t2 to 6 constituting the movable pattern A and the timing for displaying the operation request image in accordance with the rhythm of the rust portion of the music piece A, that is, the suggested timings st1 to st5 are matched. Can do.

  As a result, the player can put the five game balls held in the holding device 400 on the sorting movable valve 409 by operating the second frame button 21 well in accordance with the suggestion timings st1 to st5. It becomes easy to enter the general winning opening 31b. As a result, a maximum of 75 prize balls can be obtained during reach production.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the holding device 400 holds a game ball that is fired in a right-handed game at least in a non-special game state (normal game state) that is not a special game state. The state changes between a possible hold state and a release state in which the hold of the game ball is released. The operation effect control unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 displays the third pattern display during a specific variation display (for example, a super reach effect) according to the lottery result while the movable pattern suggestion effect is in the normal gaming state. Control to display on the device 42. Therefore, if a player launches a game ball with a right strike during the super reach production in the normal game state, a part of the launched game balls are held in the holding device 400. An opportunity to hold the game ball in the holding device 400 during the reach production can be secured. In the movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the super reach effect, the player operates the second frame button 21 in accordance with the timing at which the operation request is displayed. The holding device 400 can be changed from the holding state to the release state in accordance with the timing at which 409 reaches the second position (projecting position). Thereby, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 at the timing when the operation request is displayed can easily win a prize to the general winning opening 31b via the distribution movable valve 409 at the second position. On the other hand, even if the second frame button 21 receives the player's operation at a timing other than the timing at which the operation request is displayed, the distribution movable valve 409 is the second timing when the holding device 400 changes from the holding state to the released state. Since it does not coincide with the timing when it comes to the position, it is difficult to win the general winning opening 31b. Therefore, if the player plays a right-handed game during the super reach effect, the player actively participates in the movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the super reach effect, If the second frame button 21 can be successfully operated in accordance with the timing at which the operation request is displayed, a predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls held in the holding device 400 can be obtained in the normal gaming state. Can do. As a result, it is possible to increase the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device 400 and improve the interest of the game using the holding device 400.

  Further, by causing the player to participate in a game using the holding device 400 performed during the super reach production, it is possible to reduce the player from getting bored with the reach production with a long variation time such as the super reach production.

  In addition, the operation effect control unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 notifies the player that a right-handed game is performed during the super reach effect, and also suggests a movable pattern during the super reach effect after the right hand notification. The effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. Thus, the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 after the operation effect control unit makes a right-handed notification during the super reach effect, so that the player holds the hold device during the super reach effect. Missing the opportunity to hold the game ball at 400 can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, instead of eliminating the gaming parts having the open / close door 32b used as the variable winning device 32 in the first to third embodiments and the gaming parts used as the second starting port 34, the first to third embodiments The game component used as the first start port 33b is used as the variable winning device 32. The configuration of this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a front view showing the configuration of the gaming board 30 of the fourth embodiment in a state where it is attached to the inner frame 12.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery for determining whether or not the big hit state is to be generated is performed based on the entrance detection at the first start port 33a. In the case where the result of the lottery based on the entrance detection at the first start port 33a is a result of generating a big hit state, the opening / closing member 33c that has opened and closed the first start port 33b in the first to third embodiments, It functions as the door member 32b (referred to as the opening / closing member 33d in this embodiment) that has opened and closed the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 in the first to third embodiments.

  During the normal gaming state, the opening / closing member 33d of the variable winning device 32 is closed, so that the game ball fired in the right-handed game rolls on the opening / closing member 33d and is downstream of the opening / closing member 33d (game). It is discharged from the left end of the board 30 in front view. The discharged game ball may be guided to the holding device 400 side while being rolled by a nail or the like disposed between the variable winning device 32 and the holding device 400, or may be guided to the holding device 400 side. It may not be done. In addition, the ratio by which the game ball rolled by a nail etc. is induced | guided | derived to the holding | maintenance apparatus 400 shall be comparable as Examples 1-3.

  During the big hit state, the opening / closing member 33d of the variable prize-winning device 32 changes between an open state and a closed state. Therefore, even when the opening / closing member 33d is open, even a game ball fired in a right-handed game is stored in the holding device 400. Although not guided, while the opening / closing member 33d is closed, the game ball fired in the right-handed game may roll on the opening / closing member 33d and be guided to the holding device 400. However, since the time in the closed state during the jackpot state is sufficiently shorter than the time in the open state, the game ball fired in the right-handed game during the jackpot state is shorter than that during the normal game state. It is difficult to be guided to.

  In this way, the game board 30 is configured such that a game ball launched in a right-handed game is more easily held in the holding device 400 in the normal game state than in the big hit state. Thus, when the right-handed notification effect as described in the third embodiment is executed during the super reach effect as the specific variation display in the normal game state, the player is more right-handed than the jackpot state. The right-handed game is actively performed aiming at the holding device 400 in which the launched game ball is easily held. As a result, the player's intention to participate in a game using the holding device 400 can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the game ball launched in the right-handed game in the normal game state rolls on the opening / closing member 33d that is normally closed in the normal game state and is reliably guided to the holding device 400 side, the nail adjustment is performed. Thus, it is possible to more reliably guide the game ball launched in the right-handed game to the holding device 400 side in the normal gaming state than when guiding to the holding device 400 side.

  The opening / closing member 33d described above corresponds to the guiding member of the present invention.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the game board 30 is more likely to be held in the holding device 400 in the normal game state than in the big hit state. It is configured. As a result, a game ball fired in a right-handed game is more likely to be held in the holding device 400 in the normal gaming state than in the big hit state, depending on the configuration of the game board 30. It is possible to make a player play a right-handed game positively during super reach production.

  The game board 30 is provided with, for example, an opening / closing member 33d of the variable prize winning device 32 as a guide member for guiding the game ball fired in the right-handed game to the holding device 400 in the normal gaming state. As a result, the game ball fired in the right-handed game in the normal gaming state is guided to the holding device 400 side by the opening / closing member 33d of the variable winning device 32 provided on the game board 30, so that the holding device 400 is only adjusted by nail adjustment. The game ball launched in the right-handed game in the normal game state can be guided to the holding device 400 side more reliably than in the case of guiding to the side.

  In this embodiment, instead of losing the gaming parts used as the first start opening 33b and the second starting openings 34 in the first to third embodiments, the first first embodiment in the first to third embodiments is used. Only the gaming component (referred to as the opening / closing member 33e in the present embodiment) used as the opening / closing member 33c for opening / closing the start port 33b is left. The configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a front view showing the configuration of the gaming board 30 of the fifth embodiment in a state where it is attached to the inner frame 12.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery for determining whether or not the big hit state is to be generated is performed based on the entrance detection at the first start port 33a. When the variation display based on the result of the lottery based on the entrance detection at the first start port 33a includes a specific variation display, the opening / closing member 33e is on the front side of the lower right game area 30a3 during the specific variation display. And the operation of retracting to the back side of the lower right game area 30a3 are repeated. The specific variation display is, for example, a super reach production as described in the third embodiment. Further, the opening / closing member 33e is configured not to perform the protrusion and the retreat operation when the variation display based on the result of the lottery based on the entrance detection at the first start port 33a does not include the specific variation display. ing. Note that the opening / closing member 33e may be configured to continue to protrude during a period in which a specific variation display is displayed.

  Since the opening / closing member 33e repeatedly projects and retracts during the super reach production as a specific variation display, the game ball launched in the right-handed game is projected to the front side of the lower right game area 30a3. It rolls on 33e and is discharged from the downstream side of the opening / closing member 33e. The discharged game ball may be guided to the holding device 400 side while being rolled by a nail or the like disposed between the opening / closing member 33e and the holding device 400, or may not be guided to the holding device 400 side. In some cases. In addition, the ratio by which the game ball rolled by a nail etc. is induced | guided | derived to the holding | maintenance apparatus 400 shall be comparable as Examples 1-3.

  During the reach production different from the super reach production or during the non-reach fluctuation display, the opening / closing member 33e does not perform the protruding operation and remains in the back side of the lower right game area 30a3. Even a game ball that has been launched is not guided to the holding device 400.

  In this way, the game board 30 has a holding device 400 in which the game ball fired in the right-handed game is in the super-reach direction, rather than in the reach direction different from the super-reach effect or non-reach fluctuation display. It is configured to be easily held on the side. Thus, when the right-handed notification effect as described in the third embodiment is executed during the super reach effect, the player is more right than the non-reach variable display during the reach effect different from the super reach effect. The player hits the right-handed game positively, aiming at the holding device 400 in which the game ball launched by the hitting game is easily held. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's intention to participate in a game using the holding device 400 during the super reach production.

  In addition, the game ball launched in the right-handed game during the super reach production rolls on the opening / closing member 33e while the opening / closing member 33e protrudes to the front side of the lower right game area 30a3, and the holding device 400. Therefore, it is possible to guide the game ball fired by the right-handed game to the holding device 400 side during the super reach production more reliably than when guiding to the holding device 400 side only by adjusting the nail. it can.

  The opening / closing member 33e described above corresponds to the guide member of the present invention.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the game board 30 is in the right direction during the super reach production rather than during the reach production different from the super reach production or during the non-reach fluctuation display. A game ball launched by a hitting game is easily held on the holding device 400 side. Thereby, the game ball fired in the right-handed game is more easily held on the holding device 400 side in the super reach production than in the reach production different from the super reach production due to the configuration of the game board 30. Although the original game is that a player plays a right-handed game during a super reach production in a normal gaming state, the player plays a right-handed game during another reach production in a normal gaming state. It is possible to reduce a game that is out of the game.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an opening / closing member 33e as a guide member for guiding a game ball fired in the right-handed game to the holding device during the super reach production. Thereby, the game ball fired in the right-handed game during the super reach production is guided to the holding device 400 side by the opening / closing member 33e provided in the game board 30, and is guided to the holding device 400 side by nail adjustment. More reliably than in the case, the game ball launched by the right-handed game during the super reach production can be guided to the holding device 400 side.

  In Examples 1 to 5 described above, the timing at which the display of the movable pattern suggestion effect is started is after a predetermined time from a certain timing, but the movable pattern suggestion effect is at an arbitrary time from a certain timing. It does not matter even if it has passed. For example, the movable pattern suggestion effect may be executed based on a predetermined number of game balls held in the holding device 400.

  In the following, a configuration necessary for a gaming machine that executes a movable pattern suggestion effect based on the detection of a full tank of game balls held in the holding device 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. FIG. 64 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 30 of the sixth embodiment in a state where it is attached to the inner frame 12. FIG. 65 is an enlarged view of the lower right game area 30a3 in the game board 30 of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 65 shows a state in which the decorative plate 413 is removed from the holding device 400 as in FIG. 4 of the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the holding device 400 is provided with a holding ball detection switch 437 as a game ball detection means on the upstream side of the holding unit 403, and as a game ball detection means on the downstream side. A holding ball detection switch 438 is provided. Thereby, the game balls guided to the holding device 400 enter the holding device 400 from the through hole of the holding ball detection switch 437 and are stored in the holding unit 403 up to five balls, and the second frame button 21. When the discharge prevention valve 405 is driven by depressing the button, it is discharged from the holding unit 403 and discharged out of the holding device 400 through the through hole of the holding ball detection switch 437. When the game balls discharged to the outside of the holding device 400 get on the sorting movable valve 409 protruding from the lower part of the holding device 400, they are guided to the general winning port 31b and enter the general winning port 31b.

  Two movable decorative pieces 415 are disposed on the decorative plate 413 that covers the front surface of the holding device 400. One movable decorative piece 415 is disposed on the front surface of the discharge prevention valve 405, and the other movable decorative piece 415 is disposed on the front surface of the sorting movable valve 409. The two movable decorative pieces 415 are operated at a timing that does not motivate the distributing operation of the movable decorative piece 415 and the distributing movable valve 409, respectively. This makes it difficult to press the second frame button 21 in accordance with the timing of the sorting operation of the sorting movable valve 409.

  The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 adds 1 to the number of game balls stored in the storage area of the RAM 553 based on the detection of the game ball passing by the holding ball detection switch 437, and passes the game ball by the holding ball detection switch 438. 1 is subtracted from the number of game balls stored in the storage area of the RAM 553 based on the detection of. As described above, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has a counting function for counting the number of game balls held by the holding device 400.

  The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 compares the number of game balls stored in the storage area of the RAM 553 with the number of game balls stored in advance in the storage area of the ROM 552 (for example, 5 balls when full). A function is also provided for determining whether or not the number of game balls held in the holding device 400 has reached a predetermined number (for example, 5 balls when full). That is, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 includes a full tank determination unit that determines whether or not the number of game balls held in the holding device 400 has reached full.

  In the present embodiment, the movable pattern is based on the fact that the game ball held in the holding device 400 becomes full (5 balls on hold) during a specific variation display in the normal gaming state (for example, during super reach production). Perform suggestive effects.

  There are various timings when the game ball held in the holding device 400 becomes full. Therefore, in this embodiment, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 displays a video of a song (hereinafter, song C) different from the song A or the song B until the game ball held in the holding device 400 becomes full. The music is played, and the video and music of the climax part of the music A or the music B constituting the movable pattern suggestion effect are switched according to the timing when the game ball held in the holding device 400 becomes full.

  A movable pattern suggestion effect executed during the reach effect in the normal gaming state performed by the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 73. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the variable display mode setting process by the sub-control device 262. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the lower limit start time setting process during the reach effect by the sub-control device 262. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a movable pattern suggestion effect process by full tank detection performed by the sub-control device 262. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the movable pattern suggestion effect process by the lower limit start time performed by the sub-control device 262. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing music switching timing adjustment processing by full sub detection performed by the sub-control device 262. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the music switching timing adjustment processing based on the lower limit start time performed by the sub-control device 262. FIG. 72 is a table for determining the adjustment effect time and the music during the movable pattern suggestion effect process. FIG. 73 is a table for determining the lower limit start time and the music during the movable pattern suggestion effect process.

(Variation display mode setting process)
The variable display mode setting process of the present embodiment is different from the variable display mode setting process described with reference to FIG. 48 in the second embodiment because the process for executing the movable pattern suggesting effect is different. explain.

  As shown in FIG. 66, in step S2102, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs start music determination processing for determining the music to be played first in the reach effect, and proceeds to step S2103. When the variation pattern designation command indicates the super reach effect, the music at the start of the super reach effect is determined as the music C. In other reach productions, music is determined according to the type of reach production.

  In step S2103, a lower limit start time setting process for setting the lower limit start time of the movable pattern suggestion effect in the reach effect is performed. The lower limit start time setting process during reach production will be described below.

(Lower limit start time setting process during reach production)
As shown in FIG. 67, in step S2301, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 takes time (delay time) from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 to the reception time of the variation pattern designation command. Is stored in the storage area v of the RAM 553. In step S2302, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 analyzes the received variation pattern designation command and stores the time from the start of variation to the start of reach production in the storage area w of the RAM 553.

  In step S2302A, the received variation pattern designation command is analyzed, and the reach effect time from the start to the end of the reach effect is stored in the storage area z of the RAM 553. In step S2303, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the total time obtained by adding the delay time stored in the storage area v and the time from the start of change to the start of reach production stored in the storage area w in the RAM 553. Store in area x.

  In step S2304, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x is longer than 15 seconds corresponding to a half cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409. If the total time is greater than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2305. If the total time is less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2314.

  In step S2305, it is determined whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x coincides with 30 seconds corresponding to one cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409. If the total time is equal to 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2306; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2308.

  In step S <b> 2306, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 takes the time obtained by subtracting 15 seconds for executing the movable pattern suggestion effect from the reach effect time stored in the storage area z, and the latest when the movable pattern suggestion effect is started. The time (lower limit start time) is stored in the storage area y of the RAM 553. In step S2307, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a lower limit start time flag 1 indicating this lower limit start time.

  In step S2308, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the time stored in the storage area x is within a range greater than 15 seconds and less than 30 seconds. If the determination result is within the range, the process proceeds to step S2309. If the determination result is not within the range, the process proceeds to step S2311.

  In step S2309, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses the time obtained by subtracting the time stored in the storage area x from the reach effect time stored in the storage area z as the lower limit start time of the movable pattern suggestion effect in the storage area of the RAM 5543. Remember y. In step S2310, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a lower limit start time flag 2 indicating the lower limit start time.

  In step S2311, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether the time stored in the storage area x is longer than 30 seconds. If the determination result is greater than 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2312.

  In step S2312, from the reach production time stored in the storage area z, the time (x-30) exceeding 30 seconds among the time stored in the storage area x, and 15 seconds for executing the movable pattern suggestion production, Is stored in the storage area y of the RAM 553 as the lower limit start time of the movable pattern suggestion effect. In step S2313, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a lower limit start time flag 3 indicating the lower limit start time.

  In step S2314, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the time stored in the storage area x is equal to 15 seconds. If the determination result is equal to 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2315, and if the determination result is not equal to 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2317.

  In step S2315, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the time obtained by subtracting 15 seconds for executing the movable pattern suggestion effect from the reach effect time stored in the storage area z as the lower limit start time of the movable pattern suggestion effect. The data is stored in the storage area y of the RAM 553. In step S2316, a lower limit start time flag 4 indicating this lower limit start time is set.

  In step S2317, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 starts the lower limit of the movable pattern suggesting effect by subtracting the time obtained by subtracting 15 seconds from the time stored in the storage region x from the reach effect time stored in the storage region z. The time is stored in the storage area y of the RAM 553. In step S2318, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a lower limit start time flag 5 indicating this lower limit start time.

  Returning to the description of FIG. After completion of the lower limit start time setting process in step S2103, in step S2104, a display command for displaying a reach effect image with the music determined in step S2102 is set, and this process ends.

  In step S <b> 2105, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the game ball held in the holding device 400 is full (full tank detection). If the determination result is full, the process proceeds to step S2106. If the determination result is not full, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S <b> 2106, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a movable pattern suggestion effect process by full tank detection.

(Moving pattern suggestion effect processing by full tank detection)
Here, the movable pattern suggestion effect process by full tank detection will be described with reference to FIG. In step S2107A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs music switching timing adjustment processing by full tank detection described later, and proceeds to step S2107B. In step S2107B, a display command for displaying the movable pattern suggestion effect accompanying the music switched in step S2107A is set, and the flow proceeds to step S2107C.

  In step S2107C, CPU 551 of sub control device 262 determines whether or not the movable pattern suggestion effect has ended. In such a determination, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 turns on the movable pattern suggestion effect executing flag at the start of the movable pattern suggestion effect, and turns off the flag at the end of the movable pattern suggestion effect. It is realized by doing. If the movable pattern suggestion effect ends, the process proceeds to step S2107D, and if the movable pattern suggestion effect does not end, the present process ends. In step S2107D, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 returns the music used in the movable pattern suggestion effect to the music C at the start of the super reach effect, and ends this process.

  Returning to FIG. In step S2108, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the reach effect elapsed time has reached the lower limit start time. If the determination result is the lower limit start time, the process proceeds to step S2109, and if the determination result is not the lower limit start time, the process proceeds to step S2111. That is, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 includes a lower limit start time determination unit as a function of determining whether or not the elapsed reach time has reached the lower limit start time.

  In step S2109, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a movable pattern suggestion effect process with a lower limit start time for performing a movable pattern suggestion effect when the lower limit start time is reached.

(Moving pattern suggestion effect processing by lower limit start time)
Here, the movable pattern suggestion effect process based on the lower limit start time will be described with reference to FIG. In step S2110A, a music switching process based on a lower limit start time described later is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2110B. In step S2110B, a display command for displaying the movable pattern suggestion effect with the music switched in step S2110A is set, and the process proceeds to step S2110C.

  In step S2110C, CPU 551 of sub control device 262 determines whether or not the movable pattern suggestion effect has ended. Such a determination is as described above with reference to step S2107C shown in FIG. If the movable pattern suggestion effect ends, the process proceeds to step S2110D, and if the movable pattern suggestion effect does not end, the process ends. In step S2110D, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 returns the music used in the movable pattern suggestion effect by the lower limit start time to the music C at the start of the super reach effect, and ends this process.

(Music switching timing adjustment process by full tank detection)
The music switching timing adjustment processing based on full tank detection in step S2107A will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 70, in step S2401, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 reaches the full number of game balls held in the holding device 400 from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409. The detected time (delay time) is acquired and stored in the storage area a of the RAM 553. In step S2402, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the time (seconds) of one cycle of the movable cycle in the storage area b of the RAM 553. In step S2403, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the time obtained by subtracting the delay time stored in the storage area a from the time of the movable cycle stored in the storage area b in the storage area c of the RAM 553.

  In step S2404, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the time stored in the storage area c is 0 seconds. If the determination result is 0 second, the process proceeds to step S2405. If the determination result is not 0, the process proceeds to step S2407. Here, on the third symbol display device 42, an adjustment effect that congratulates that the holding device 400 is full between the time when the full tank is detected and the start time of the movable pattern suggestion effect (hereinafter, congratulations full). Effect) is displayed. There are 15 types of full-filled effects from 1 second to 15 seconds, and an effect with a length corresponding to the timing of full-tank detection is determined. The full congratulation effect is displayed as a still image or a moving image, but is displayed as an image with a smaller amount of information than the movable pattern suggestion effect in order to reduce the amount of memory used in the adjustment effect.

  In step S2405, 15 seconds is stored in the storage area d of the RAM 553 as the adjustment time for executing the full-filled effect for 15 seconds. In step S2406, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs the adjustment time (15 seconds) stored in the storage area d and a congratulations effect, then switches the song C to the chorus portion of the song B, and suggests a movable pattern. Start production.

  In step S2407, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the time stored in the storage area c is less than 15 seconds. If the determination result is less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2408, and if the determination result is greater than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2410. In step S2408, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the time stored in the storage area c in the storage area d of the RAM 553 as the adjustment time for executing the effect of congratulations. In step S2409, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes a congratulation effect for the time stored in the storage area d, and then switches the music piece C to the climax part of the music piece A and starts the movable pattern suggestion effect.

  In step S2410, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the time stored in the storage area c is equal to 15 seconds. If the determination result is equal to 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2411. If the determination result is not equal to 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2413. In step S 2411, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores 15 seconds in the storage area d of the RAM 553 as the adjustment time for executing the full congratulation effect. In step S2412, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes the congratulation effect for 15 seconds stored in the storage area d, and then switches the music piece C to the climax part of the music piece A and starts the movable pattern suggestion effect. .

  In step S2413, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the time stored in the storage area c is longer than 15 seconds. If the determination result is greater than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2414. In step S2414, a time obtained by subtracting 15 seconds from the time stored in the storage area c is stored in the storage area d of the RAM 553 as an adjustment time for executing the effect of congratulations. In step S2415, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes a congratulation effect for the time stored in the storage area d, and then switches the music piece C to the climax part of the music piece B and starts the movable pattern suggestion effect.

  The adjustment time for executing the above-mentioned congratulations effect and the process of determining the music to be played during the movable pattern suggestion effect process are stored in the ROM 552 of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 as shown in FIG. You may use a table. In such a table, the full tank detection delay time a corresponding to the time stored in the storage area a, the movable period time b corresponding to the time stored in the storage area b, and the storage area c are stored. (B-a) corresponding to the time to be performed, congratulations production time d corresponding to the time stored in the storage area d, and the movable pattern suggestion effect processing determined according to each time Music is stored in advance. Thereby, the processing speed of the step mentioned above can be improved.

  Thus, when the music C is switched to the music A or the music B, the rhythm of the music A or the music B after the switching matches the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect. Thereby, the rhythm of the music A or the music B and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect can be matched.

(Music switching process by lower limit start time)
Next, the music switching process based on the lower limit start time described above with reference to step S2110A shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 71, in step S2501, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not at least one ball and a game ball are held in the holding unit 403 of the holding device 400. Specifically, the determination is based on the incoming ball detection by the holding ball detection switch 437 and the discharge detection by the holding ball detection switch 438. If it is a determination result that at least one ball and a game ball are held, the process proceeds to step S2502, and if it is a determination result that a game ball is not held, this process ends. That is, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 includes a lower limit number determination unit as a function of determining whether or not at least one ball and a game ball are held in the holding unit 403 of the holding device 400.

  In step S2502, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the type of the lower limit start time flag set in the above-described lower limit start time setting process is “1”. If the determination result is the lower limit start time flag 1, the process proceeds to step S2503, the music that has been played so far is switched to the chorus part of the music B, and the movable pattern suggestion effect is started. If the determination result is not the lower limit start time flag 1, the process proceeds to step S2504.

  In step S2504, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the type of the lower limit start time flag set in the above-described lower limit start time setting process is 2. If the determination result is the lower limit start time flag 2, the process proceeds to step S2505, the music that has been played so far is switched to the rust portion of the music A, and the movable pattern suggestion effect is started. If the determination result is not the lower limit start time flag 2, the process proceeds to step S2506.

  In step S2506, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the type of the lower limit start time flag set in the lower limit start time setting process described above is three. If the result of the determination is the lower limit start time flag 3, the process proceeds to step S2507, where the tune that has been played so far is switched to the climax portion of the tune B, and the movable pattern suggestion effect is started. If the determination result is not the lower limit start time flag 3, the process proceeds to step S2508.

  In step S2508, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the type of the lower limit start time flag set in the above-described lower limit start time setting process is four. If the determination result is the lower limit start time flag 4, the process proceeds to step S 2509, the music that has been played so far is switched to the climax part of the music A, and the movable pattern suggestion effect is started. If the determination result is not the lower limit start time flag 4, the process proceeds to step S2510.

  In step S2510, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the type of the lower limit start time flag set in the above-described lower limit start time setting process is 5. If the determination result is the lower limit start time flag 5, the process proceeds to step S2511, the music that has been played so far is switched to the climax part of the music B, and the movable pattern suggestion effect is started.

  The process for determining the lower limit start time and the process for determining the music to be played during the movable pattern suggestion effect process based on the lower limit start time are the tables stored in the ROM 552 of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 as shown in FIG. May be used. In such a table, the fluctuation start delay time v corresponding to the time stored in the storage area v, the fluctuation time w before the start of the reach effect corresponding to the time stored in the storage area w, and the storage area x (V + w) time x corresponding to the time stored in time, reach production time z, lower limit start time y corresponding to time stored in the storage area y, lower limit start time flag type, and lower limit start The music during the moving pattern suggestion effect process according to time is stored in advance. Thereby, the processing speed of the step mentioned above can be improved.

  As described above, when at least one game ball is held at the timing when the reach effect time becomes the lower limit start time, the music C is switched to the music B, and the movable pattern suggesting effect is started. When the music C is switched to the music A or the music B, the rhythm of the music A or the music B after the switching matches the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect. Thereby, the rhythm of the music A or the music B and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect can be matched. Hereinafter, an example is given and demonstrated about this movable pattern suggestion effect.

  Next, the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 during the reach effect in the normal gaming state and the suggested timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. 74 is a timing chart of an example of a movable pattern suggesting effect based on full tank detection during the reach effect in the normal gaming state. FIG. 75 is a timing chart of a movable pattern suggesting effect example based on the lower limit start time during the reach effect in the normal gaming state.

(Moving pattern suggestion effect example 1 performed during the reach effect in the normal gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 74, the sorting movable valve 409 is driven at a constant cycle configured by the same fixed pattern as in the first to third embodiments. Here, in the normal gaming state, the variable display is started, and this variable pattern command is a super reach effect (the lottery result may be winning or losing), and the reach effect time is 120 seconds.

  At this time, the above-described variation display starts at the same timing as the movable timing t10 (22 seconds after the start of the movable cycle), and after the variation display is performed for five seconds from the start of variation to the start of reach production, it is slightly less than the movable timing t11. The reach effect is started at a delayed timing (27 seconds after the start of the movable cycle). For example, for 15 seconds from the start of the reach effect, a right-handed notification effect for causing the player to play a right-handed game is performed. Music C starts simultaneously with the start timing of reach production.

  If the player launches a game ball in a right-handed game immediately after the start of the reach effect, a full tank of the holding device 400 is detected 60 seconds after the start of the music piece C. The timing at which the storage device 400 is detected to be full is a timing slightly delayed from the start timing of the movable pattern A (27 seconds after the start of the movable cycle).

  That is, the full tank detection delay time a is 27 seconds, the movable period time b is 30 seconds, and the time c obtained by subtracting the time a from the time b is 3 seconds. The music piece that is 3 seconds in the moving pattern suggestion effect is the music piece A (see also FIG. 72).

  Therefore, after performing a full-contained effect for 3 seconds from the timing of full tank detection of the holding device 400 to the start timing of the movable pattern A, the musical piece C is switched to the rust portion of the musical piece A and the movable pattern suggesting production is started. To do. The music A is returned to the music C at the end of the movable pattern suggestion effect. Thereafter, the music piece C ends when the reach production ends.

  Thus, in the movable pattern suggestion effect, the movable timings t2 to t6 constituting the movable pattern A and the timing for displaying the operation request image in accordance with the rhythm of the chorus portion of the music piece A, that is, the suggested timings st1 to st5 are matched. be able to. As a result, the player operates the second frame button 21 well in accordance with the suggestion timings st1 to st5, thereby distributing the full tank (5 balls) of the game balls held in the holding device 400 to the distribution movable valve 409. It becomes easy to enter the general winning opening 31b. As a result, a maximum of 75 prize balls can be obtained during reach production.

(Moving pattern suggestion effect example 2 performed during reach effect in normal gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 75, the movable pattern suggestion effect example 2 is a case where the holding device 400 is not full in the same variable display as the above-described movable pattern suggestion effect example 1.

  In this example, the player fires a game ball in a right-handed game for about 40 seconds from the start of reach production, and 3 game balls are held in the holding device 400, but then the game ball is stopped from firing. To do. In this case, the full state of the holding device 400 is not detected. Therefore, since at least one game ball is held, the reach effect is ended after the movable pattern suggestion effect is performed at the timing when the reach effect time becomes the lower limit start time.

  In other words, the variation start delay time v is 22 seconds, the time w from the start of variation to the start of reach production is 5 seconds, and the time x obtained by adding the time v and time w is 27 seconds. Since the time z is 120 seconds, the lower limit start time y is 93 seconds, the type of the lower limit start time flag is 2, and the musical piece in the movable pattern suggestion effect is the musical piece A (see also FIG. 73).

  Therefore, at the timing when 93 seconds elapse from the start of the reach effect, the music C is switched to the rust portion of the music A, and the movable pattern suggesting effect is started. The music A is returned to the music C at the end of the movable pattern suggestion effect. Thereafter, the music piece C ends when the reach production ends.

  Thus, in the movable pattern suggestion effect, the movable timings t2 to t6 constituting the movable pattern A and the timing for displaying the operation request image in accordance with the rhythm of the chorus portion of the music piece A, that is, the suggested timings st1 to st5 are matched. be able to. Thereby, when at least one game ball is held at the time when the lower limit start time is reached, it is possible to reduce the use of the held game ball.

  The full tank determination unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 described above corresponds to the upper limit number determination unit of the present invention. The lower limit start time determination unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 described above corresponds to the lower limit timing determination unit of the present invention. The lower limit number determination unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 described above corresponds to the lower limit number determination unit of the present invention.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the movable pattern suggestion effect is obtained by holding the upper limit number of game balls in the holding device 400 by the full tank determination unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262. If it is determined that the operation request image is displayed by the operation effect control unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262, the suggestion timing at which the operation request image is displayed is displayed as an effect that matches the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the complexity of the player due to the display of the operation effect even when only the game balls that are less than the hold upper limit number are held.

  In addition, until the lower limit start time determination unit of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines that the display effect execution time reaches the lower limit start time, at least the holding lower limit number ( When it is determined that one game ball is held, the distribution control valve 409 comes to the protruding position at the timing when the operation request image is displayed by the effect control unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262. An operation effect in accordance with the timing is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. As a result, even when the full tank determination unit determines that the upper limit number of game balls are not held in the holding device 400, at least one ball is required before the reach effect execution time reaches the lower limit start time. When it is determined that the game ball is held, the movable pattern suggestion effect is obtained by matching the timing at which the operation request image is displayed with the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position. 42. Therefore, even though the game ball is held in the holding device 400, the decrease in the game willingness due to the fact that the movable pattern suggesting effect is not displayed is only because the holding upper limit number is not reached. it can.

  In the above-described sixth embodiment, when the game ball held in the holding device 400 becomes full during the reach effect in the normal game state, or when the reach effect time reaches the lower limit start time, Although the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed based on the game ball being held, the game ball held in the holding device 400 becomes full not only during the reach effect in the normal game state but also in the big hit state. Or the moving pattern suggestion effect may be executed based on the latest round (lower limit start round) for executing the movable pattern suggestion effect. In addition, since the movable pattern suggestion effect based on full tank detection in the holding device 400 is the same as the content described in the sixth embodiment, the details are referred to the sixth embodiment.

  The movable pattern suggesting effect based on the lower limit start round performed by the sub control device 262 during the big hit state will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an open / close mode (big hit) display setting process performed by the sub-control device 262. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the movable pattern suggestion effect process by the lower limit start round performed by the sub-control device 262. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the music switching timing adjustment process in the lower limit start round by the sub-control device 262. FIG. 79 is a table for determining the adjustment effect time and the music during the movable pattern suggestion effect process.

(Open / close mode (big hit) display setting process)
The open / close mode (big hit) display setting process of the present embodiment is different from the open / close mode (big hit) display setting process described in Embodiment 1 with reference to FIG. 26 in the process for executing the movable pattern suggesting effect process. Therefore, this point will be mainly described.

  As shown in FIG. 76, in step S2603, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a start music determination process for determining the music to be played first in the jackpot effect. When the maximum number of rounds is a big hit effect of 16 rounds, it is determined that the music D is the music at the start. In the case of a jackpot effect with another maximum number of rounds, it is determined that another song is the starting song.

  In step S2606, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the game ball held in the holding device 400 has become full (full tank detection). If the determination result is full, the process proceeds to step S2607, and if the determination result is not full, the process proceeds to step S2609. In step S2607, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a movable pattern suggestion effect process by full tank detection.

  The movable pattern suggestion effect process of the present embodiment is the same as the movable pattern suggestion effect process by full tank detection described in the sixth embodiment with reference to FIG. For this reason, this embodiment also performs the movable pattern suggestion effect based on the full tank detection in the same manner. Also, the music switching timing adjustment process executed in the movable pattern suggestion effect process of the present embodiment is the same as the music switching timing adjustment process by full tank detection described in the sixth embodiment with reference to FIG. For this reason, the present embodiment also adjusts the timing for switching from the music D during the jackpot effect to the music during the movable pattern suggestion effect process based on the full tank detection.

  In step S2609, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the big hit round has reached the lower limit start round. If the determination result is the lower limit start round, the process proceeds to step S2610, and if the determination result is not the lower limit start round, the process proceeds to step S2112. That is, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 includes a lower limit start round determination unit as a function of determining whether or not the jackpot round has reached the lower limit start round.

  In step S <b> 2610, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a movable pattern suggestion effect process by a lower limit start round for performing a movable pattern suggestion effect when the lower limit start round is reached.

(Moving pattern suggestion effect processing by lower limit start round)
Here, the movable pattern suggestion effect process by the lower limit start round will be described with reference to FIG. In step S2610A, a music switching timing adjustment process by a lower limit start round described later is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2610B. In step S2610B, a display command for displaying the movable pattern suggestion effect accompanying the music switched in step S2610A is set, and the flow proceeds to step S2610C.

  In step S2610C, CPU 551 of sub control device 262 determines whether or not the movable pattern suggestion effect has ended. If the result of determination is that the movable pattern suggestion effect has ended, the process proceeds to step S26110D, and if it has not ended, this process ends. In step S <b> 2610 </ b> D, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 returns the music used in the movable pattern suggestion effect to the music D at the start of the jackpot effect.

(Music switching timing adjustment process in the lower limit start round)
The music switching process in the lower limit start round described above in step S2610A will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in step S2901, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not at least one ball and a game ball are held in the holding unit 403 of the holding device 400. If it is a determination result that at least one ball and a game ball are held, the process proceeds to step S2902, and if it is a determination result that a game ball is not held, this process ends.

  In step S2902, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 to the reception time of the fourteenth round designation command indicating the start of the fourteenth round which is the lower limit round. The obtained time (delay time) is acquired and stored in the storage area e of the RAM 553. In step S 2903, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the movable cycle time (15 seconds) in the storage area f of the RAM 553.

  In step S2904, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the time obtained by subtracting the delay time stored in the storage area e from the time of the movable cycle stored in the storage area f in the storage area g of the RAM 553.

  In step S2905, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the time stored in the storage area g is 0 seconds. If the time stored in the storage area g is 0 second, the process proceeds to step S2906; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2908. In step S2906, 15 seconds is stored in the storage area h of the RAM 553 as the adjustment time for executing the adjustment effect. The process proceeds to step S2907. In step S2907, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs the adjustment effect for 15 seconds stored in the storage area h, and then starts the movable pattern suggestion effect by the rust portion of the music B.

  In step S2908, it is determined whether the time stored in the storage area g is less than 15 seconds. If the time stored in the storage area g is less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2909, and if not less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2911. In step S2909, the time stored in the storage area g as the adjustment time for executing the adjustment effect is stored in the storage area h of the RAM 553. In step S2910, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs the adjustment effect for the time stored in the storage area h, and then starts the movable pattern suggestion effect by the rust portion of the music piece A.

  In step S2911, it is determined whether the time stored in the storage area g is equal to 15 seconds. If the time stored in the storage area g is equal to 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2912, and if not less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2914. In step S2912, 15 seconds is stored in the storage area h of the RAM 553 as the adjustment time for executing the adjustment effect. In step S2913, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs the adjustment effect for 15 seconds stored in the storage area h, and then starts the movable pattern suggestion effect by the rust portion of the music piece A.

  In step S2914, it is determined whether the time stored in the storage area g is longer than 15 seconds. If the time stored in the storage area g is less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2915. In step S2915, the time obtained by subtracting 15 seconds from the time stored in the storage area g is stored in the storage area h of the RAM 553 as the adjustment time for executing the adjustment effect. In step S2916, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs the adjustment effect for the time stored in the storage area h, and then starts the movable pattern suggestion effect by the rust portion of the music B.

  Tables stored in the ROM 552 of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 as shown in FIG. 79 are the adjustment time for executing the adjustment effects as described above and the process of determining the music to be played during the movable pattern suggestion effect process. May be used. In such a table, the delay time e of the lower limit start round (14R) designation command corresponding to the time stored in the storage area e, the time f of the movable period corresponding to the time stored in the storage area f, (F−e) time g corresponding to the time stored in the storage area g, adjustment effect time h corresponding to the time stored in the storage area h, and a movable pattern suggestion effect determined according to each time The music being processed is stored in advance. Thereby, the processing speed of the step mentioned above can be improved.

  In this way, when at least one game ball is held at the timing of the lower limit start round (14 rounds) after the movable pattern suggestion effect based on the full tank detection is executed during the big hit state, After performing the adjustment effect for a predetermined time, the music D is switched to the climax part of the music A or the music B, and the movable pattern suggestion effect is started. When the music D is switched to the chorus part of the music A or the music B, the rhythm of the chorus part of the music A or the music B after the switching matches the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggesting effect. Thereby, the rhythm of the chorus part of the music A or the music B can be matched with the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect. In the following, this movable pattern suggesting effect will be described with an example.

  Next, the relationship between the movable timing of the sorting movable valve 409 based on full tank detection during the big hit effect and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 80 is a timing chart of a movable pattern suggestion effect example showing the relationship between the movable timing of the sorting movable valve 409 based on the full tank detection during the big hit effect and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect. FIG. 81 is a timing chart following FIG.

(Example of moving pattern suggestion effect based on full tank detection during jackpot effect)
As shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the sorting movable valve 409 is driven at a constant cycle configured by the same movable pattern as in the first to fifth embodiments. Here, it is assumed that the big hit state is a maximum number of rounds of 16 and the lower limit number of rounds is 14 rounds. The jackpot state is started 20 seconds after the start of the movable cycle. At this timing, the jackpot effect with the music D is started.

  If the player fires a game ball in a right-handed game immediately after the start of the jackpot effect, the full capacity of the holding device 400 is detected about 75 seconds after the start of the jackpot effect. The timing at which the full storage device 400 is detected is a timing slightly delayed from the start timing of the movable pattern A (5 seconds after the start of the movable cycle).

  That is, the delay time a for full tank detection is 5 seconds, the time b of the movable cycle is 30 seconds, and the time c obtained by subtracting the time a from the time b is 25 seconds. The music for 10 seconds and the moving pattern suggesting effect is the music B (see also FIG. 72).

  Therefore, after performing a full-filled effect for 10 seconds from the timing of full tank detection of the holding device 400 to the start timing of the movable pattern B, the music D is switched to the rust portion of the music B, and the movable pattern accompanying the music B is switched. Start suggestion production.

  Thus, in the movable pattern suggestion effect, the movable timings t8 to t12 constituting the movable pattern B and the timing for displaying the operation request image in accordance with the rhythm of the climax part of the music B, that is, the suggested timings st6 to st10 are matched. Can do. As a result, the player operates the second frame button 21 well in accordance with the suggestion timings st6 to st10, thereby distributing the full tank (5 balls) of the game balls held in the holding device 400 to the distribution movable valve 409. It becomes easy to enter the general winning opening 31b. After the end of the movable pattern suggestion effect, the music B is switched to the music D, and the jackpot effect by the music D is continued again.

  It is assumed that game balls are continuously fired even after the full tank is detected, and three game balls are held in the holding device 400 when reaching the 14th round. At this time, at the start of the 14th round, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed based on the condition that at least one or more game balls are held. The 14th round start time coincides with the start timing of the movable pattern A.

  That is, the delay time e of the 14R designation command is 0 second, the movable period time f is 30 seconds, and the time g obtained by subtracting the time e from the time f is 30 seconds. The music that is the second and the moving pattern suggesting effect is the music B (see also FIG. 79).

  Therefore, after performing the adjustment effect for 15 seconds from the start of the lower limit start round, the music D is switched to the climax part of the music B in accordance with the start timing of the movable pattern B, and the movable pattern suggestion effect with the music B is performed. Is started. Thereby, in the movable pattern suggestion effect, the movable timings t8 to t12 constituting the movable pattern B can be matched with the suggested timings st5 to st10 for displaying the operation request image in accordance with the rhythm of the music B. As a result, if the second frame button 21 is successfully operated in accordance with the suggestion timings st5 to st10, the three game balls remaining in the holding device 400 can be placed on the sorting movable valve 409, and the general winning opening It becomes easy to enter 31b. Since the end timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect overlaps with the end timing of the jackpot state, the jackpot state ends with the music B.

  Note that the lower limit start round determination unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 described above corresponds to the lower limit timing determination unit of the present invention.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the operation effect is produced when the full tank determination unit determines that the upper limit number of game balls are held in the holding device. Since the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed in accordance with the timing at which the operation request image is displayed in accordance with the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 is in the protruding position, only game balls that are less than the upper limit number of hold are held. It is possible to reduce the complexity of the player due to the display of the operation effect.

  In addition, when it is determined by the lower limit number determination unit that at least the holding lower limit number of game balls (for example, one ball) is held before the lower limit start round determination unit determines that the big hit round reaches the lower limit start round In addition, the third pattern display device 42 displays a movable pattern suggestion effect that matches the timing at which the operation request image is displayed with the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 is in the protruding position by the effect control unit. Thereby, even if it is a case where it is determined that the full tank game ball is not held in the holding device 400 by the full tank determining unit, at least the number of the holding lower limit number is required until the execution time of the display effect reaches the lower limit timing. If it is determined that the game ball is held, an operation effect that matches the timing at which the operation request image is displayed with the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 is in the second position is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. Since it is displayed, it is possible to reduce the attenuation of the game will due to the fact that the movable pattern suggesting effect is not displayed only because the holding ball 400 is held in the holding device 400, but only because the holding upper limit number is not reached.

  In Examples 1 to 7 described above, the movable pattern suggesting effects include those accompanied by the music A and those accompanied by the music B, but the respective effects are not intentionally selectable by the player, There was no clear difference in the difficulty and ease of operation of the movable pattern suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as difficulty level). Therefore, in the movable pattern suggestion effect of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the player can select the degree of difficulty and that there is a clear difference in the degree of difficulty.

  A movable pattern suggestion effect that can be selected by the player using the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an open / close mode (big hit) display setting process by the sub-control device 262. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the difficulty level selection processing of the movable pattern suggestion effect by the sub-control device 262.

(Open / close mode (big hit) display setting process)
As shown in FIG. 82, the open / close mode (big hit) display setting process of the present embodiment is the open / close mode (big hit) described in the seventh embodiment with reference to FIG. 76, except for the difficulty pattern suggestion effect selection process. ) Same as the display setting process. Therefore, in the following, the difficulty level selection process of the movable pattern suggesting effect will be described, and the other processes will refer to the description of the seventh embodiment.

  In step S2603A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a movable pattern suggestion effect difficulty level selection process for enabling the player to select the difficulty level of the operation of the second frame button 21 in the movable pattern suggestion effect. That is, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 includes a difficulty level selection display unit as a function for displaying a selection image for enabling selection of the difficulty level of the operation of the second frame button 21 in the movable pattern suggestion effect.

(Difficulty selection process for moving pattern suggestion)
As shown in FIG. 83, in step S3001, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 analyzes the contents of the opening command and determines whether the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot state is 16 rounds. When the maximum number of rounds in the big hit state is 16 rounds, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed, and the process advances to step S3002 to perform the difficulty level selection process. If the number of rounds in the jackpot state is not 16 rounds, this processing is terminated.

  In step S3002, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 displays the difficulty level selection image for causing the player to select whether the difficulty level of the operation of the movable pattern suggestion effect is “normal” or “easy”. It is displayed on the display device 42. The difficulty level selection image is displayed during the opening effect period.

  In step S3003, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the player has selected “normal” or “easy” as the difficulty level of the operation of the movable pattern suggestion effect. If it is determined that the player has selected “normal” (step S3003: YES), the process proceeds to step S3004, and if it is determined that the player has selected “easy” (step S3003: NO), step is performed. The process proceeds to S3005.

  In step S3004, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines that the display command is the normal mode display command when the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed. In step S3005, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines that the display command is an easy mode display command when the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed.

  If it is determined in step S3004 that the display command of the movable pattern suggestion effect command is set to the normal mode, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed in the normal mode. When it is determined in step S3005 that the display command of the movable pattern suggestion effect command is set to the easy mode, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed in the easy mode.

  The timing of the movable pattern A and the movable pattern B of the distribution movable valve 409 and the suggestion image display in the example of the movable pattern suggestion effect in the easy mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 84A to 84C are a series of timing charts showing the timing of the movable pattern A of the sorting movable valve 409 and the suggestion image display. 85A to 85C are a series of timing charts showing timings of the movable pattern B of the sorting movable valve 409 different from FIG. 84 and the suggestion image display. 86 (a) and 86 (b) are diagrams showing a movable pattern suggesting effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the big hit state. 87 (a) and 87 (b) are diagrams showing a movable pattern suggestion effect following FIG.

  The timing of the movable pattern A of the distribution movable valve 409 and the suggestion image display in the example of the movable pattern suggestion effect in the easy mode will be described with reference to FIG. On the third symbol display device 42, an image (a) describing the rhythm game is displayed for 1.0 second from 0.0 second after the start of the movable cycle to 1.0 second after the start of the movable cycle. As shown in FIG. 86A, the image (A) is displayed as “easy rhythm game mode” indicating that the movable pattern suggestion effect is the easy mode selected by the player.

  An image (A) indicating the start of the rhythm game is displayed from 1.0 second after the start of the movable cycle to 9.0 seconds after the start of the movable cycle. 86 (b) illustrates an operation method of the second frame button 21 in the movable pattern suggestion effect in the easy mode, as shown in FIG. 86 (b). “When the mark overlaps the drum, the drum button is repeatedly pressed. The operation explanation image 423 is displayed. During this period, the movable timing t1 to the movable timing t3 of the movable pattern A arrive, but the operation request image indicating the suggestion timing is not displayed.

  An image (c) informing that the operation timing of the second frame button 21 is approaching is displayed for 0.85 seconds from 9.00 seconds after the start of the movable cycle to 9.85 seconds after the start of the movable cycle. . As shown in FIG. 87A, the image (c) is displayed as an image in which the continuous hit request image 436 in which the characters “continuous hit!” Are displayed approaches the operation timing image 425.

  An image (d) notifying that it is the operation timing of the second frame button 21 is displayed for 1.5 seconds from 9.85 seconds after the start of the movable cycle to 11.35 seconds after the start of the movable cycle. The image (D) is displayed as an image (D) in which the continuous hit request image 436 completely overlaps the operation timing image 425, as shown in FIG. 87 (b). The movable timing t4 and the movable timing t5 arrive in 1.5 seconds when the overlapping image (d) is displayed. The 1.5 seconds during which the overlapping image (D) is displayed is referred to as suggestion timing st11.

  Of the period in which the overlapping image (D) is displayed, the hatched lines in FIGS. 84B and 84C indicate 9.85 seconds after the start of the movable cycle (that is, the symbol “D1” in the figure). The timing “D1”, hereinafter referred to in the same manner) and 0.55 seconds after the start of the movable cycle (timing “D2”) and after the start of the movable cycle 10.85 seconds Any of the timings when the player repeatedly hits the second frame button 21 in any one of 0.5 seconds from (timing “d 3”) to 11.35 seconds after the start of the movable cycle (timing “d 4”) If the coins overlap, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 rides on the distribution movable valve 409 indicated by either the movable timing t4 or the movable timing t5, is guided to the general winning port 31b, and wins the general winning port 31b. To do. In order to obtain such a result, the time from the pressing of the second frame button 21 to the start of driving of the discharge prevention valve 406 and the time for the discharge prevention valve 406 to be displaced between the holding position and the discharge position are appropriately adjusted. .

  After 11.35 seconds from the start of the movable period, an image (e) informing that the operation timing of the second frame button 21 has ended is displayed. The image (e) is displayed as an image in which the continuous hit request image 439 moves away from the operation timing image 425 or disappears from the display screen. After 15.0 seconds from the start of the movable period, the movable pattern suggestion effect accompanied by the music A ends.

  The timing of the movable pattern B of the sorting movable valve 409 and the suggestion image display in the example of the movable pattern suggestion effect in the easy mode will be described with reference to FIG. In the following, the description will focus on the period during which the above-described overlapping image (D) is displayed.

  The above-described overlapping image (D) is displayed for 2.5 seconds from 19.85 seconds after the start of the movable cycle to 22.35 seconds after the start of the movable cycle. The movable timing t8 to the movable timing t10 arrive in 2.5 seconds when the overlapping image (d) is displayed. The 2.5 seconds during which the overlapping image (D) is displayed is referred to as suggestion timing st12.

  Of the period during which the overlapping image (D) is displayed, the movable period is indicated after 19.85 seconds (timing “E5”) after the start of the movable period, indicated by hatching in FIGS. 85 (a) and 85 (b). 0.5 seconds from the start 20.35 seconds (timing “d6”), and 20.35 seconds after the start of the movable cycle (timing “d7”) to 21.35 seconds after the start of the movable cycle (timing “d” 0.5 seconds until the start of the movable cycle (timing “d 9”) to 0.5 seconds from 22.35 seconds after the start of the movable cycle (timing d 10) If any of the timings at which the player repeatedly hits the second frame button 21 overlaps with any of the above, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 is distributed and movable as shown in any one of the movable timings t8 to t10. Take the valve 409 and enter the general prize opening 3 It is induced to b, to win in the regular winning opening 31b.

  Therefore, even if the player is unfamiliar with the operation of pressing the second frame button 21 in accordance with the rhythm of the music A or the music B like the operation in the movable pattern suggestion effect in the normal mode, the movable pattern in the easy mode. In the suggestion effect, if the second frame button 21 is repeatedly hit during the period in which the overlapping image (d) is displayed, at least one of the full game balls held in the holding device 400 is surely distributed. It is easy to place the movable valve 409 on the general winning opening 31b and guide it to the general winning opening 31b.

  The operation mode of the second frame button 21 in the movable pattern suggestion effect in the normal mode described above corresponds to the first operation mode of the present invention, and the movable pattern suggestion effect in the normal mode corresponds to the first operation effect of the present invention. Equivalent to. The operation mode of the second frame button 21 in the movable pattern suggestion effect in the easy mode described above corresponds to the second operation mode of the present invention, and the movable pattern suggestion effect in the easy mode corresponds to the second operation effect of the present invention. . The difficulty level selection display section of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 described above corresponds to the difficulty level selection display means of the present invention.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern suggesting effect includes at least the movable pattern suggesting effect in the normal mode and the movable pattern suggesting effect in the easy mode. The difficulty level selection display unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 can select at least one of the movable pattern suggestion effects to be displayed among the movable pattern suggestion effects in the normal mode or the movable pattern suggestion effects in the easy mode. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The operation effect control unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 displays the movable pattern suggestion effect selected during display of the selected image on the third symbol display device 42. Thereby, a player who does not like difficult operations can select a movable pattern suggestion effect in the easy mode, and a player who does not have the choice can select a movable pattern suggestion effect in the normal mode. In this way, it is possible to provide a movable pattern suggesting effect according to the player's preference.

  In the first to eighth embodiments described above, the movable pattern suggestion effect is set to a length of one cycle, with one cycle (hereinafter also referred to as a movable cycle) from the start of the movable pattern A to the end of the movable pattern B being 30 cycles. Although the distribution operation for a second is periodically repeated, a plurality of types of movable pattern suggesting effects may be executed according to a plurality of types of movable cycles having different lengths. In the present embodiment, a gaming machine having a plurality of types of movable periods having different lengths and executing a movable pattern suggesting effect by changing the movable period at a predetermined timing after the power is supplied to the gaming machine main body will be described.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the start of a jackpot state in which the maximum number of rounds is 8 rounds will be described as an example of the predetermined timing for changing the movable period after power is supplied to the gaming machine body.

  In Examples 1 and 6, since the movable pattern suggestion effect was executed when the maximum number of rounds in the big hit state was 16 rounds, in the right-handed game, a game ball is placed in the holding device 400 at a rate of 1 in 15 balls. It takes 75 seconds for the full (5 balls) game balls to be put on hold, and even if the movable movable valve 409 executes the move pattern suggestion effect with a move cycle of 30 seconds per cycle, the move pattern suggestion effect Was fully feasible. However, as the maximum number of rounds in the big hit state becomes smaller than 16 rounds, it is expected that the movable pattern suggestion effect cannot be executed in the above-described movable period.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of movable periods and movable pattern suggesting effects are prepared, and even in a big hit state where the maximum number of rounds is less than 16 rounds, a distribution operation and a movable pattern suggesting effect in accordance with the movable period are executed. to enable.

  Specifically, this embodiment has 8 rounds in addition to 2 rounds and 16 rounds as the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot state. When a jackpot state in which the maximum number of rounds is 8 occurs, a movable pattern suggestion effect for 10 seconds is executed based on the detection that three game balls are held in the holding device 400. Corresponding to the movable pattern suggestion effect for 10 seconds, the distribution movable valve 409 repeats the movable pattern C for 10 seconds and the movable pattern D for 10 seconds with a movable period of 20 seconds per cycle. A configuration necessary for such a gaming machine will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating normal processing performed by the main controller 261 according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the movable cycle changing process of the sorting movable valve 409 in the normal process of FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating an open / close mode (big hit) display setting process performed by the sub-control device 262 according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a table for determining the adjustment time and the music during the movable pattern suggestion effect process. FIG. 92 is a timing chart of a movable pattern suggestion effect example showing the relationship between the movable timing of the sorting movable valve 409 and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect in the 8-round big hit state.

  In the following description, when a right-handed game is continued during the jackpot state, the time required from the start to the end of one round is 10 seconds, and the time required for the eight-round jackpot state is 80 seconds. Also, assume that 60 game balls are fired in 60 seconds in a right-handed game.

  In Examples 1-8, as shown in step S112 of FIG. 11, the distribution movable valve 409 was repeatedly driven with the above-described movable period of 30 seconds as soon as the power was turned on, but in this example, In addition to this, when a jackpot state in which the maximum number of rounds is 8 rounds occurs, the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 is changed. That is, as shown in step S207A of FIG. 88, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 includes a movable cycle changing unit as a function of changing the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 in normal processing. The movable period changing process for changing the movable period of the sorting movable valve 409 will be described below.

(Moving cycle change processing of the distribution movable valve)
As shown in FIG. 89, in step S3101, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the big hit state where the maximum number of rounds is 8 has been won. If the maximum number of rounds is 8, the process proceeds to step S3102. If the maximum number of rounds is not 8, this process ends. In step S3102, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether it is the end timing of the opening effect. If it is the end timing of the opening effect, the process proceeds to step S3103; otherwise, the process ends.

  In step S3103, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether it is the end timing of the movable cycle of one cycle 30 seconds. If it is the end timing of one cycle of 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S3104, and if not, this process ends. In step S3104, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 changes the movable period of the sorting movable valve 409 from one movable period of 30 seconds to one movable period of 20 seconds. Thereby, the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 is continuously changed from the movable cycle of one cycle 30 seconds to the movable cycle of one cycle 20 seconds, so that the player is aware that the movable cycle is changed. Can be difficult.

  In step S3105, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether it is the end timing of the ending effect informing the end of the big hit state. If it is the end timing of the ending effect, the process proceeds to step S3106. If not, the process ends. In step S3106, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether it is the end timing of the movable cycle of one cycle of 20 seconds. If it is the end timing of the movable cycle of one cycle of 20 seconds, the process proceeds to step S3107, and if not, this processing ends.

  In step S3107, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 changes the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 from the movable cycle of one cycle 20 seconds to the movable cycle of one cycle 30 seconds. As a result, the movable period of the distribution movable valve 409 is continuously returned from the movable period of one cycle of 20 seconds to the movable period of one cycle of 30 seconds, so that the player is aware that the movable cycle has been changed. Can be difficult.

(Open / close mode (big hit) display setting process)
Of the opening / closing mode (big jackpot) display setting process of the present embodiment, the process when the opening command is received and the process when the full tank is detected are the same as those described with reference to FIG. Therefore, hereinafter, a process different from the process of the sixth embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 90, in step S2606A, when the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives a signal other than the opening command (step S2601: NO), it determines the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot state. If it is not a 16-round big hit state, the process proceeds to step S2620.

  In step S2620, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the type of jackpot state is an eight-round jackpot state. If it is a big hit state of 8 rounds, it will progress to step S2621. In step S2621, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the number of game balls held in the holding device 400 has reached three. When game balls continue to be fired in the right-handed game from the start of the big hit state, the number of game balls held in the holding device 400 reaches three balls 45 seconds after the big hit state starts. If the determination result is three balls, the process proceeds to step S2622.

  In step S <b> 2622, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a movable pattern suggestion effect process by detecting three balls. Incidentally, the movable pattern suggestion effect process based on the detection of three balls includes a music switching timing adjustment process based on the detection of three balls, except that the period of the movable cycle is 20 seconds. Since it is the same as the music switching timing adjustment processing by full tank detection described with reference to the description, the description of the sixth embodiment and FIG.

  The adjustment time for executing the adjustment effect and the process of determining the music to be played during the movable pattern suggestion effect process are performed using a table stored in the ROM 552 of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 as shown in FIG. May be. Such a table includes a three-ball detection delay time a, a movable period time b, a time c of (ba), and an adjustment effect time d corresponding to the time stored in the storage area d. , The music in the movable pattern suggestion effect determined according to each time is stored in advance. Since the period of the movable cycle has been shortened from 30 seconds to 20 seconds, the musical piece in which the movable pattern suggestion is produced is the rust portion of the musical piece A of 10 seconds (hereinafter referred to as musical piece A1) in which the rust portion of the musical piece A of 15 seconds is further shortened. Or the rust portion of the music B for 10 seconds (hereinafter referred to as the music B1) obtained by further shortening the rust portion of the music B for 15 seconds.

(Example of moving pattern suggestion based on detection of 3 balls during a 8 round jackpot presentation)
As shown in FIG. 92, the movable cycle of one cycle 30 seconds is changed to a movable cycle of one cycle 20 seconds after the opening production end timing has passed and at the movable cycle change timing. The change timing of the movable cycle is the end timing of the even-numbered cycle of the movable cycle of one cycle of 30 seconds, counted from the start of the sorting operation when the power is turned on. A movable cycle of one cycle of 20 seconds is started in accordance with the end timing of the even-numbered cycle of the movable cycle of one cycle of 30 seconds. Therefore, although it seems to the player that the allocating operation of the allocating movable valve 409 continues continuously, it is difficult to detect the change timing of the movable cycle.

  A movable pattern of the sorting movable valve 409 having one cycle of 20 seconds will be described. As shown in FIG. 92, the movable pattern of the displacing movable valve 409 with a period of 20 seconds starts from the start of the big hit state, and is executed in 10 seconds after the movable pattern A1 described later that is executed in 10 seconds. This is a pattern in which a later-described movable pattern B1 is continuous. Specifically, the movable pattern A1 is a pattern having the movable timing after 2 seconds (t1), 4 seconds (t2), 7 seconds (t3), and 10 seconds (t4) from the start of the movable cycle. The pattern in which the movable pattern A is shortened (the latter half is omitted). The movable pattern B1 is a pattern having a movable timing of 11 seconds (t7), 15 seconds (t8), 16 seconds (t9), and 17 seconds (t10) after the start of the movable cycle. The pattern is shortened (the second half is omitted).

  If the player fires a game ball in a right-handed game immediately after the start of the jackpot effect, the three-ball hold of the holding device 400 is detected about 45 seconds after the start of the jackpot effect with the music D. The timing at which the three-ball hold of the holding device 400 is detected is a timing slightly delayed from the start timing of the movable pattern A1 (15 seconds after the start of the movable cycle of one cycle 20 seconds).

  That is, the delay time a for detecting the three balls is 15 seconds, the time b of the movable cycle is 20 seconds, and the time c obtained by subtracting the time a from the time b is 5 seconds. And the musical piece in which the movable pattern suggestion is produced is the musical piece A1 (see also FIG. 91).

  Therefore, after performing the adjustment effect for 5 seconds from the timing of detecting the three balls of the holding device 400 to the start timing of the movable pattern A1, the music D is switched to the music A1, and the movable pattern suggesting effect with the music A1 is started. .

  Thereby, in the movable pattern suggestion effect, the movable timings t2 to t4 constituting the movable pattern A1 can be matched with the timing for displaying the operation request image in accordance with the rhythm of the music A1, that is, the suggested timings st1 to st3. After the end of the movable pattern suggestion effect, the music A1 is switched to the music D, and the jackpot effect by the music D is continued again.

  In addition, the movable cycle changing unit of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 described above corresponds to a movable cycle changing unit of the present invention.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the sorting operation of the sorting movable valve 409 includes a first movable cycle (for example, a movable cycle of one cycle of 30 seconds) and a second movable cycle having different cycles. (E.g., one cycle of 20 seconds) including a plurality of types of movable cycles, and the movable cycle changing unit of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 changes the first movable cycle to the second movable cycle, or the second movable cycle. Even when the movable cycle is changed from the cycle to the first movable cycle, the timing at which the operation request image is displayed is adjusted according to the movable timing of the sorting movable valve 409 according to the type of the changed movable cycle. The pattern suggestion effect is displayed by the operation effect control unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262. As a result, it is possible to make it harder to identify the operation timing of the sorting movable valve 409 than when the sorting operation is performed in the same movable cycle.

  In Examples 1 to 8, the movable pattern of the sorting movable valve 409 was a movable pattern in which the movable pattern A of 15 seconds and the movable pattern B of 15 seconds were repeated in one cycle of 30 seconds. The movable cycle time may be the same, or a plurality of types of movable patterns having different movable timings may be used. In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of movable patterns having different movable timings, and the movable pattern is changed at a predetermined timing after the power to the gaming machine body is turned on to execute the movable pattern suggestion effect.

  In the present embodiment, the start of a jackpot state during the probability variation state will be described as an example as a predetermined timing for changing the movable pattern after the power to the gaming machine body is turned on.

  Dividing the music used for the movable pattern suggestion effect during the jackpot effect in the normal gaming state and the music used for the movable pattern suggestion effect during the jackpot effect in the probability variation state increases the variation of the movable pattern suggestion effect. However, if the music used for the movable pattern suggestion effect during the jackpot effect is different between the normal game state and the probability variation state, if the movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409 is single, in each movable pattern suggestion effect In some cases, the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 and the suggestion timing for displaying the operation request image may not match.

  Therefore, as described above, if the movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409 in the big hit state in the normal gaming state is different from the movable pattern in the big hit state in the probability changing state, the movable in the big hit effect in the normal gaming state and the probability changing state. Even if the music used for the pattern suggestion effect is divided, the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 in the movable pattern suggestion effect can be matched with the suggestion timing for displaying the operation request image. Hereinafter, a configuration necessary for such a gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main controller 261 of the tenth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing a movable pattern changing process of the sorting movable valve 409 in the normal process of FIG. FIG. 95 is a timing chart of a movable pattern suggestion effect example showing the relationship between the movable timing of the sorting movable valve 409 in the big hit state in the probability variation state and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect. FIG. 96 is a timing chart of an example of a movable pattern suggestion effect following FIG. FIG. 97 is a table for determining the time of the adjustment effect and the music during the movable pattern suggestion effect. FIG. 98 is a table following FIG.

  In the following description, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed based on detection of a full tank of game balls held in the holding device 400 during a jackpot effect with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds.

(Normal processing)
As shown in step S207B of FIG. 93, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs a movable pattern change process for the sorting movable valve 409 in the normal process. The movable pattern changing process of the sorting movable valve 409 will be described below.

(Movement pattern change processing of the distribution movable valve)
As shown in FIG. 94, in step S3201, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the current probability of winning the big hit lottery is high. Since it is not necessary to change the movable pattern unless the probability is high (that is, if the probability is low), the present process is terminated. If the probability is high (that is, during the probability variation state), the process proceeds to step S3203.

  In the movable pattern changing process of this embodiment, the initial movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409 is changed according to the values of the first big hit random number counter C1a and the second big hit random number counter C1b when the big hit lottery is won in the probability variation state. Change to a different movable pattern. In step S3203, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines that the values of the first big hit random number counter C1a and the second big hit random number counter C1b are “50, 101, 160, 209, 257” (hereinafter referred to as group). 1), the process proceeds to step S3204. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3210.

  In step S3204, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether it is the end timing of the opening effect. If it is the end timing of the opening effect, the process proceeds to step S3205; otherwise, the process ends. In step S3205, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not it is the change timing of the movable cycle by the movable patterns A and B. If it is the change timing of the movable pattern, the process proceeds to step S3206, and the current movable patterns A and B are changed to movable patterns A2 and B2, which will be described later. Otherwise, this process ends. As will be described later, the change timing of the movable pattern is set to the end timing of the even-numbered movable cycle counting from the start of the movable cycle when the power is turned on.

  In step S3207, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether it is the end timing of the ending effect informing the end of the big hit state. If it is the end timing of the ending effect, the process proceeds to step S3208. If not, the process ends. In step S3208, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether it is the change timing of the movable pattern. If it is the change timing of the movable pattern, the process advances to step S3209 to return the movable patterns A2 and B2 to the movable patterns A and B. Otherwise, this process ends.

  In step S3210, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines “310, 361, 418, 480, 517” (hereinafter referred to as group) among the values when the values of the first big hit random number counter C1a and the second big hit random number counter C1b are high. 2) (referred to as a random number of 2). If the values of the first jackpot random number counter C1a and the second jackpot random number counter C1b correspond to these values, the process proceeds to step S3211. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3217.

  In steps S3211 to S3213, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is movable if the opening production end timing has arrived and the movable pattern change timing has arrived, as in steps S3204 to S3206 described above. The patterns A and B are changed to movable patterns A3 and B3 described later. In steps S3214 to S3216, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, if the end timing of the ending effect has arrived and the return timing of the movable pattern has arrived, as in steps S3207 to S3209 described above. The movable patterns A3 and B3 are returned to the movable patterns A and B.

  In step S3217, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines the remaining “578, 635, 677, 730” (hereinafter referred to as a group) among the values when the values of the first jackpot random number counter C1a and the second jackpot random number counter C1b are high. 3 is a random number). If the values of the first jackpot random number counter C1a and the second jackpot random number counter C1b correspond to these values, the process proceeds to step S3218.

  In steps S3218 to S3220, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is movable if the opening effect end timing has arrived and the movable pattern change timing has arrived, as in steps S3204 to S3206 described above. The patterns A and B are changed to movable patterns A4 and B4 described later. In steps S3221 to S3223, if the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has reached the end timing of the ending effect and the timing of changing the movable pattern, as in steps S3207 to S3209 described above. The movable patterns A4 and B4 are returned to the movable patterns A and B.

(Example of moving pattern suggestion during jackpot production when the moving pattern changes)
Here, in the above-described step S3106, an example of changing from the movable patterns A and B to the movable patterns A2 and B2 when winning with one of the random numbers of the group 1 at the high probability, and the movable pattern suggestion effect in that case An example will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, after the elapse of 10 seconds from the end timing of the opening effect (20 seconds after the start of the movable cycle), the end timing of the even-numbered movable cycle counted from the start of the movable cycle accompanying power-on ( It is assumed that the movable pattern change timing is reached. The original movable patterns A and B are changed to different movable patterns A2 and B2 at the end timing of the even-numbered movable cycle. Since it appears to the player that the distribution movable valve 409 is continuously moving in the same movable pattern, it is difficult for the player to notice that the movable patterns A and B have been changed to the movable patterns A2 and B2. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to decode the movable pattern of the sorting movable valve 409.

  Specifically, the movable pattern A2 has an interval of 2 seconds from the start of the movable cycle, that is, after 2 seconds (t1), after 4 seconds (t2), after 6 seconds (t3), after 8 seconds (t4), 10 There are movable timings after 2 seconds (t5) and after 12 seconds (t6). The movable pattern B2 has an interval of 2 seconds from 1 second after the start of the movable cycle, that is, after 16 seconds (t7), 18 seconds (t8), 20 seconds (t9), 22 seconds (t10), and 24 seconds later. (T11) After 26 seconds (t12), the movable timing is reached. The respective movable timings of the movable patterns A1 and B1 are designed in accordance with the rhythm of music R1 and S1 described later. Thus, the movable patterns A2 and B2 have a monotonous rhythm compared to the movable pattern in which the sorting movable valve 409 is randomly displaced to the protruding position, such as the movable patterns A and B, and the music R1 and R2 for the player. The second frame button 21 is easy to operate according to S1.

  Note that the movable patterns A3 and B3 and the movable patterns A4 and B4 may be at a movable timing that makes it easier (or difficult to operate) the second frame button 21 to match the rhythm of the music than the movable patterns A2 and B2. The movable timings of the movable patterns A3 and B3 are designed in accordance with the rhythm of music R2 and S2 described later. The movable timings of the movable patterns A4 and B4 are designed in accordance with the rhythm of music R3 and S3 described later.

  If the player launches a game ball in a right-handed game immediately after the start of the jackpot effect, a full tank of the holding device 400 is detected approximately 75 seconds after the start of the music D. The timing at which the full state of the holding device 400 is detected is a timing slightly delayed from the start timing of the movable pattern B2 (5 seconds after the start of the movable cycle).

  That is, the delay time a for full tank detection is 5 seconds, the time b of the movable cycle is 30 seconds, and the time c obtained by subtracting the time a from the time b is 25 seconds. 10 seconds. Further, since the jackpot random number at the time of high probability is group 1, the musical piece in the movable pattern suggestion effect is musical piece S1 (see also FIGS. 97 and 98).

  Therefore, after performing a full tank effect for 10 seconds from the timing of full tank detection of the holding device 400 to the start timing of the movable pattern B2, the music D is switched to the music S1, and the movable pattern suggesting effect with the music S1 is performed. Is started. As a result, in the movable pattern suggestion effect, the movable timings t8 to t12 constituting the movable pattern B2 can be matched with the timing for displaying the operation request image in accordance with the rhythm of the music S1, that is, the suggested timings st6 to st10.

  After the end of the movable pattern suggestion effect, the music S1 is switched to the music D and the jackpot effect by the music D is continued again, but the movable pattern remains the movable patterns A2 and B2 until the change timing comes. After the end of the ending effect, the movable pattern is switched from the movable patterns A2 and B2 to the movable patterns A and B at the end timing (movable pattern change timing) of the even-numbered movable cycle counting from the start of the movable cycle when the power is turned on. The movable patterns A and B are resumed again. The timing at which the movable patterns A2 and B2 are returned to the movable patterns A and B is less likely to be noticed by the player, similar to the timing at which the movable patterns A and B are changed to the movable patterns A2 and B2.

  In this way, by increasing the types of movable patterns, the number of variations of the movable pattern suggestion effect increases. Further, by making the movable timing of the movable pattern uniform or random, it is possible to change the ease of operation of the player in the movable pattern suggestion effect.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the sorting operation of the sorting movable valve 409 is performed using the first movable pattern (for example, the movable patterns A and B) and the second movable pattern ( For example, even when the movable pattern is changed from the first movable pattern to the second movable pattern by the movable pattern changing unit of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the movable pattern is changed from the first movable pattern to the second movable pattern. Depending on the type of the movable pattern that has been changed, the operation effect control unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 generates a movable pattern suggestion effect that matches the timing at which the operation request image is displayed with the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409. Is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to make it harder to identify the operation timing of the sorting movable valve 409 than when the sorting operation is performed with the same movable pattern.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be modified as follows.

  [1] In the first and second embodiments, the main control device 261 controls the driving of the sorting movable valve 409, but the sub-control device 262 drives the sorting movable valve 409 at the same timing as the first and second embodiments. May be controlled.

  [2] In the first and second embodiments, the main control device 261 starts driving the sorting movable valve 409 simultaneously with power-on in the main process shown in FIG. Simultaneously with the opening of the open / close door 32b of the round grand prize winning opening 32a, driving of the sorting movable valve 409 may be started at a constant cycle. Since the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 and the start timing of the music A or the music B coincide with each other in advance, it is not necessary to perform the start timing adjustment process shown in the first and second embodiments. Even in this case, since the driving of the sorting movable valve 409 is difficult for the player to visually recognize, the player can visually operate the second frame button 42 in accordance with the movable pattern of the sorting movable valve 409. Is not easy. [2] corresponds to an embodiment different from the first and second embodiments of the invention described in (1).

  [3] In the first and second embodiments, up to five game balls can be held in the holding device 400, but the number of game balls that can be held may be smaller or larger. The number of game balls that can be held may be one. Further, in the first and second embodiments, there is one holding device 400, but a plurality of holding devices 400 may be provided.

  [4] In the first and second embodiments, the operation effect is a display effect accompanied by music reproduction. However, the operation effect may be other than the display effect accompanied by music reproduction. For example, another example of the operation effect is an effect that only reproduces music, and the second frame button 21 may be operated in accordance with only the music rhythm. Further, another example of the operation effect is an effect of only light emission, and the second frame button 21 may be operated only in accordance with the light emission timing. In either case, the player may be taught in advance the music rhythm and timing of light emission, and then the second frame button 21 may be operated in accordance with the music rhythm and light emission timing.

  [5] In the first and second embodiments, the operation effect displays the operation request image according to the rhythm of the music. However, the operation request image may be displayed according to other timings. For example, another example of the operation effect is a mole hitting game. In this game, if the second frame button 21 is operated in synchronization with the timing at which an image of the mole coming out of the hole (operation request image) is displayed and the mole head can be hit successfully, the game device can play the game ball from the holding device 400. It is designed so that the timing at which is discharged matches the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position.

  [6] In the second embodiment, the operation effect is displayed after the end of the big hit state and during the super reach effect after the loss of super reach. It may be displayed in a period other than the later reach production. This period may be during the change of the symbol or during the non-change.

  [7] The game board 30 of the first and second embodiments is configured so that the player performs a so-called right-handed aiming at the big prize opening 32a arranged in the lower right game area 30a3 during the big hit state. 32a is arranged below the center of the game area 30a (below the first start port 33a), and the holding device 400 is arranged on either the left or right side thereof (configuration in which it is not necessary to make a right-hand hit during the big hit state) It does not matter.

  [8] In the first and second embodiments, the sorting movable valve 409 operates at a high speed, but it is difficult to visually recognize the movement of the sorting movable valve 409 by the decorative plate 413 and the movable decorative piece 415. For example, the distribution movable valve 409 may operate at a low speed. Even in such a configuration, if the player does not participate in the operation effect, it is difficult to match the timing at which the game ball is discharged from the holding device 400 and the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 is in the protruding position. .

  [9] In the first and second embodiments, the holding state switching unit 405 is configured to include one discharge prevention valve 406. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and may be configured to include two discharge prevention valves 406. For example, the hold state switching unit 405 includes a first discharge prevention valve provided slightly downstream of the hold unit 403 and a second discharge prevention valve provided further downstream than the first discharge prevention valve. The first discharge prevention valve and the second discharge prevention valve are alternately driven to the holding position and the discharge position. That is, when the first discharge prevention valve is driven to the discharge position, the second discharge prevention valve is driven to the holding position in accordance with the movement of the first discharge prevention valve, and the game ball is discharged from the holding unit 403. Not.

  When the first discharge prevention valve is driven to the holding position, the second discharge prevention valve is driven to the discharge position in accordance with the movement of the first discharge prevention valve, and the game ball held in the holding unit 403 is Of these, only one game ball held most downstream is discharged from the holding unit 403. When the first discharge prevention valve is driven to the discharge position again, the second discharge prevention valve is driven to the holding position in accordance with the movement of the first discharge prevention valve, and the game held in the holding unit 403 If there is a ball, the game ball moves downstream by one discharged ball, but the game ball is not discharged from the holding unit 403. Thus, when the player presses the second frame button 21, the game balls can be reliably discharged from the holding unit 403 one by one.

  In the configuration example in which the first discharge prevention valve and the second discharge prevention valve are alternately driven to the holding position and the discharge position, for example, a solenoid is connected to each of the first discharge prevention valve and the second discharge prevention valve. Thus, the two solenoids are alternately projected or sucked. Further, for example, a solenoid is connected to only one of the first discharge prevention valve 406 and the second discharge prevention valve, and one discharge prevention valve is driven in accordance with the protrusion or suction of the solenoid, and the other discharge prevention valve is driven. The blocking valve is configured to be driven opposite to one of the discharge blocking valves using a link mechanism.

  [10] In Example 1, both the movable pattern suggestion effect example 1 having the suggestion timing st1 to the suggestion timing st6 and the movable pattern suggestion effect examples 3 and 4 having the suggestion timing st6 to the suggestion timing st10 are both difficult to move. Although the degree did not change so much, a plurality of movable pattern suggestion effects with different levels of difficulty may be prepared. In that case, the player may be able to select a plurality of movable pattern suggestion effects with different levels of difficulty. For example, it may be possible to notify the player that some game is being played during the big hit state before starting the 16 round big hit state, and to let the player select the difficulty level of the game.

  In this case, for example, when the player selects “difficult” as the difficulty level of the game, one of the movable pattern suggesting effects examples 1 and 2 in the movable pattern A is executed as in the first embodiment. However, when the player selects “easy” as the difficulty level of the game, any one of the movable pattern suggestion effect examples 3A and 4A obtained by modifying the movable pattern suggestion effect examples 3 and 4 in the movable pattern B is executed. . For example, in the movable pattern suggestion effect examples 3A and 4A, the suggestion timings st6 and st10 in the movable pattern suggestion effect examples 3 and 4 are eliminated, and the suggestion timings st7 to st9 are combined into one suggestion timing. That is, at the new suggestion timing, from 19.95 seconds after the start of the movable period of the movable pattern B corresponding to the start time of the suggestion timing st6 to 22.75 seconds after the end time of the suggestion timing st9 ( 2. Over 80 seconds), an overlapping image of the first operation request image 431 and the operation timing image 425 is displayed. An image instructing continuous hitting of the second frame button 21 is displayed in accordance with the timing at which the overlapping image is displayed.

  As a result, if the player can press the second frame button 21 several times in 2.80 seconds when the overlapping image is displayed, the player can move the distribution movable valve 409 three times at the movable timings t8 to t10 of the movable pattern B. The game ball discharged from the holding device 400 is put on the sorting movable valve 409 and easily guided to the general winning opening 31b after the tip protrudes to the position P2 and returns to the position P2. As a result, if “easy” is selected as the difficulty level of the game and five game balls are put on hold in the holding device 400, even a player who is unfamiliar with the game can win a prize in the general winning opening 31b. It is possible to make it easier to receive the benefits of winning a prize ball. It should be noted that the degree of difficulty may be given in the same manner in the movable pattern suggestion effect of the second embodiment so that the player can select the degree of difficulty during the game.

  [11] In the second embodiment, the micro switch 418 for detecting whether or not the game ball of the holding unit 403 is held is provided, but means for detecting the number of game balls held by the holding unit 403 is provided. Also good. For example, a passage detection sensor that detects a game ball entering the holding unit 403 at the entrance to the holding unit 403 and detects a game ball discharged from the holding unit 403 below the discharge prevention valve 406 is provided. One is provided. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 counts the number of game balls held in the hold unit 403 from the count number of game balls entering the hold unit 403 and the count number of game balls discharged from the hold unit 403. It has a function. In this way, whether or not to display the movable pattern suggestion effect may be determined according to the number held in the holding device 400.

  [12] In the first and second embodiments, the variable winning device 32 is arranged at a position where the game ball can be entered when the game ball is launched by the right-handed game. The game ball may be placed at a position where the game ball can enter even when the game ball is launched by any game.

  [13] In the first and second embodiments, the movable pattern of the sorting movable valve 409 is a repetition of one type of movable cycle. However, a plurality of types of movable cycles may be provided. For example, the setting may be such that the type of movable cycle changes each time the player finishes the game. In this case, each time the type of movable cycle changes, it is necessary to match the movable timing with the rhythm of the music, so the music used in the movable pattern suggestion effect may be different, but different parts are used in the same music May be. Thus, by increasing the types of movable cycles, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the movable timing of the movable cycles.

  [14] In the first and second embodiments, the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, but in a display device separate from the third symbol display device 42. A movable pattern suggesting effect may be executed. Further, the movable pattern suggestion effect is not limited to the image display effect by the liquid crystal display device, and the operation timing of a certain accessory may correspond to the suggestion timing.

  [15] In the sixth, seventh, ninth, and tenth embodiments, as shown in FIGS. 74, 80, 92, and 95, a plurality of types (1 to 15 seconds) having different lengths of time during which the adjustment effect is executed. Up to 15 types of adjustment effects were facilitated, but instead of fixing the length of time during which the adjustment effects are executed, a plurality of types of moveables with different lengths of time during which the movable pattern suggestion effects are executed A pattern suggestion effect may be prepared. The plurality of types of movable pattern suggestion effects include, for example, 15 types of movable pattern suggestion effects from 16 seconds to 30 seconds, a period from the start 1 second to 15 seconds not including the suggestion timing, and the start 16 including the suggestion timing. The rhythm game may be performed without the drive of the discharge prevention valve 405 even if the second frame button 21 is pressed in the period from 1 second to 30 seconds. . Thus, even when multiple types of movable pattern suggesting effects having different lengths of time are prepared, the operation effect that matches the timing at which the operation request image is displayed with the timing at which the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position. It can be displayed on the 3 symbol display device 42.

  [16] In Examples 6, 7, 9, and 10, as shown in FIGS. 74, 80, 92, and 95, the adjustment effect has the same length as the length of time for which the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed ( 15 seconds), the adjustment effect may not include the adjustment effect for 15 seconds. In this case, under the conditions in which the adjustment effects for 15 seconds were executed in Examples 6, 7, 9, and 10, the movable pattern suggestion effect is started without executing the adjustment effects. That is, in this modified example, a plurality of types (14 types of 1 second to 14 seconds) of movable pattern suggestion effects having a length of time shorter than the length of time of the movable pattern suggestion effect (15 seconds) are prepared. Thereby, in this modification, the memory usage can be reduced as compared with the case where 15 kinds of adjustment effects of 1 to 15 seconds are prepared as in the sixth, seventh, ninth and tenth embodiments.

  [17] The present invention may be implemented in various (for example, first type, third type, etc.) gaming machines, or may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a different type from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Moreover, after a jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that enters a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Moreover, you may implement as a pachinko machine which will be in a special game state when a ball enters a predetermined winning opening. Further, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines using game balls such as arranged ball pachinko and sparrow balls may be used.

  [18] Configurations for carrying out the invention, each of the first to tenth embodiments, and the invention described in the above-described modified embodiments are appropriately changed, replaced, deleted, combined, or the like, unless they contradict each other. It is also possible.

  As described above, the present invention is suitable for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

21 ... Second frame button (operation means)
30 ... Game board 30a ... Game area 30a3 ... Lower right game area 31b ... General winning opening 42 ... 3rd symbol display device (display means)
400 ... Holding device (holding device)
409 ... Distributing movable valve (sorting member)
411: Distributing operation control unit (CPU 501 of main control device 261)
557 ... Operation effect control unit (CPU 551 of sub-control device 262)

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area where game balls can flow down;
Starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
At least when a right-handed game is performed, a game ball that flows down the game area is provided at a position where the game ball can enter, a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and a game ball that is easier to enter than in the closed state Variable entry means that changes to an open state;
Entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting entry means;
Lottery means for performing lottery capable of determining whether or not to cause a special gaming state based on detection of a game ball by the ball detection means;
A gaming machine in which a predetermined display effect is displayed on a display means based on the result of the lottery being a predetermined result,
A holding device that changes between a holding state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be held and a release state in which the holding of the game ball is released;
A prize opening that is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter if the game ball is not released from the holding device in the game area, and a predetermined game value is obtained based on the game ball entering;
An operation means for receiving an operation of a player, including an operation of changing the hold device from the hold state to the release state;
A sorting operation is performed that changes between a first position that makes it difficult to win the game ball whose hold has been released to the winning opening and a second position that makes it easier to win the game ball whose hold has been released to the winning opening. A sorting member;
An operation effect control means for controlling an operation effect including an operation request display requesting an operation of the operation means to be displayed on the display means during the display of the predetermined display effect;
A distribution operation control means for controlling the distribution operation of the distribution member at a timing not synchronized with a start timing of the predetermined display effect and the operation effect;
The operation effect control means adjusts at least one of the predetermined display effect and the operation effect so that the timing at which the operation request is displayed matches the timing at which the sorting member comes to the second position. A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images